EAA Bae ata SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. es In compliance with current copyright law, U. C. Library Bindery produced this volume on paper that meets ANSI Standard Z39.48-1992 to replace the deteriorated, damaged, or lost original. 2014 A GRAMMAR OF THE SANSKRIT LANGUAGE: BY P. TIZLAORKN, Pu.D,, LL.D, C1.E, PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT IN THE UNIVERSITY OF GOTTINGEN; LATE PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES, DECCAN COLLEGE. FOURTH EDITION, REVISED. Registered under Act XXV. of 1867. PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TUKARAM JAVAJI, Propr1ETOR OF JAVAJE DADASYS “NIRNAYA-SAGAR” PRESS. we Bombay. / Rest ie 2 Avy : | UNIVERSITY oa (All rights reserved.) Price 2 Lupees. | deh 18 r | 7 sormiin w toan TK (60 r 3 EE LIBR a 7 Ks CAL iPoRN\Re” \Da PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. VIAIA 2 \ NY bl, / THE present grammar, which is published at the request and under the patronage of Mr. J. B. Peile, the Director of Public Instruction in this Presidency, is intended principally for Indian students. It contains as much of the Sanskrit accidence as is necessary for the ordinary B.A. examination. Those who look higher, I refer to the Siddhanta-Kaumudi and other indigenous works on grammar, without a careful study of which a scholarlike knowledge of the Sanskrit language appears to me unattainable. My chief aim in composing this grammar has been correctness, and to attain this object I have considered it the safest plan not to give any rules nor to put down any forms without the authority of the best native grammarians. I trust I may not appear pre- sumptuous in maintaining that this has not always been an easy task, and that in many cases much patient labour and weighing of arguments had to be gone through before a certain form could, on the best possible authority, either be accepted as correct or rejected as incorrect. The result of my labour is before the public; and having done my best, I shall be grateful to every one who will take the trouble to point out to me any errors which insufficient care or reading or want of judgment has allowed me 10 pass unnoticed. On the arrangement of my grammar only few words need be sald here. I have considered it necessary to separate the roots of the tenth class from those of the other nine classes, and to treat of them under the head of derivative verbal bases. Most scholars pill, I hope, approve of this change. Nor will they, I trust, object to the introduction of the Subjunctive mood in § 218. That the terms Radical Aorist and S-Aorist will be generally approved \ vi PREFACE. of I feel less assured, and I shall be ready to give up the S-Aorist for any better or more scientific term that may be suggested to me* To introduce into a Sanskrit grammar the expressions First and Second Aorist at a time when the best Greek grammars try to get rid of them, appears to me little advisable; and I cannot see the appropriateness of the terms Simple and Compound Aorist when it is far from certain that the letter s, which is employed in the formation of the four last varieties of the Aorist, is really the remainder of the root as ‘to be.’ F. KIELHORN. Deccan College, March, 1870. PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. In the third edition of this grammar I have drawn more pro- minently attention to the insertion of the intermediate 4, and have introduced the very convenient terms anif and sef. I have also added a chapter on syntax which, like the rest of my grammar, is based on the rules of the native grammarians. This fourth edition is a revised reprint of the third. For the publication of it I am indebted to the Proprietor of a Press has many claims on the gratitude of both Indian and Europear scholars. | iB, KIELHORN: Gattingen, May, 1896. : * In the Second Edition the term Sibilant-Aorist has been adopted from, Professor Whitney’s grammar, TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE Crsrren. ITH D LEETERS 33 Lidice tienlisativne oe 1 1. The NAigari Alphabet §§ 1—6 ... ; 2. Classification of the Letters §§ 7—12 ... CrnaprEr IL.—RULES OF EUPHONY §§ 13—59 ... A. Tinal and initial letters of complete words §§ 13—41 ... CD Cy ew 1. Contact of final and initial vowels §§ 17—25 2. Contact of final vowels and consonants with initial vowels and consonants §§ 26—41 ... (@) Changes of final consonants §§ 26—37 ... (0) Changes of initial consonants §§ 38—41 52 11 B. Changes of final letters of nominal and verbal Bases and initial letters of Terminations, and of other letters on @» in the interior of words §§ 42—59 ... .. 12 Cuarrer IIL—DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTAN- TIVE AND ADJECTIVE § 60—168 ... .. .. 14 A. Congonautal Bases $88 71-180... fees ees iiss. ei, oe 16 1. Unchangeable Bases §§ 71—91 ... .. .. .. 16 Decl. I. Basesinupand gg §§ 71—72 ... .. .. 16 Decl. II. Bases in radical consonants other than nasals and semivowels §§ 73—82 ... .. .. 18 Decl. III. Bases in g §§ 83—84 . asf fone 24 Decl. IV. Bases in the suffixes ™ fr and i fox $8 85-87 avi Send oes sen 25 Decl. V. Bases in the e's i, =, a Iq §§ 88—91 ... vos 27 2. Changeable Bases §§ 92—130 ste. hum wv 28 Decl. VI. Comparative Bases in gg §§ 97100... 29 Decl. VII. Participle Bases in sq §§ 101—108 ... 30 Decl. VIII, Bases in the suflixes gg and % §§ 109—113 arn. wenn sna. tas euttt ir wei 33 vill CONTENTS. PAGE Decl. IX. Bases in the suffixes #7, o and hay $5 11121 i Hann en fees 35 Decl. X. Perfect-Participle Bases in gg §§ 122—125 7 en bee = W089 Decl. XI. Bases in 319 wa 5 126130 mall dl B. Vowel-Bases §§ 131—153 on ee we ee 42 Decl. XII. Bases in 37 and #17 § 131135. os 42 Decl. XIII. Bases in g and § §§ 136—140 ... ... 44 Decl. XIV. Femin. Bases in § and % §§ 141—144 47 Decl. XV. Monosyll. Masc. and Fem. Bases in 3, 5 % at end of Tatpur. Comp. §§ 145—147 ... 48 Decl. XIV. Bases in zg §§ 148—152 ... .. ... 49 Decl. XVII. Bases in §, off, and af § 153... ... 51 A list of some irregular Bases §§ 154—166 ... ... 52 Suffixes expressing the meanings of cases and inde- clinable nouns §§ 167—168 ... .. .. 56 in IV.—COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES hs 169— 176 v vuni aoii Fines ‘ aoe eee D6 (2) By means of the re tes aT a aw § 160—172 ... .. 56 (6) By means of the primary an = gre ns e $13--175 | ... .. 57 Crsprer V.—PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, AND THEIR DECLENSION § 177—200 ... 60 1. Personal Pronouns 38 177-=178 ... .... v0 wi. 60 2. Demonstrative Pronouns §§ 179—181... ... ... 01 3. The Relative Pronoun § 182 ... ov vee ove vn 04 4. The Interrogative Pronoun §§ 183—184 65 5. Indefinite Pronouns §§ 185—186 ... 65 6. Reflexive Pronouns §§ 187—188 ... 65 7. Possessive Pronouns §§ 189—190 vas 05] 8. Correlative Pronouns §§ 191-192 '... .. ... 66! 9. Reciprocal Pronouns $193 ... cv ie sre see BF] 10. Pronominal Adverbs § 194 ... ‘.... ... «.. a... BF 11. Pronominal Adjectives §§ 195—200 ... ... .. G68 CONTENTS. ix PAGE CuapTER VIL—-NUMERALS AND THEIR DECLENSION $5: 200-318 {sii vis ibeet tiny wee ie. ii... 09 Cardinals and Ordinals §§ 201—203 NS, G9 Declension of the Cardinals and Ordinals §§ 204—212 73 Numeral Adverbs and other Numeral Derivatives $03 ada, ihm CuaprEr VIL—CONJUGATION OF VERBS Metin 75 I. Conjugation of Primitive Roots §§ 221—403 ... ... 77 I. The Parasmaipada and Atmanepada §§ 224—385... 78 Augment and Reduplication §§ 228—232... ... 79 A, Bpecial Tenses §8§ 234-296 ... ... eee oa B82 (a) Special Tenses of Roots with unchangeable special Base ( lst, 4th, and 6th Classes ) $52538—200" ... i eee eee ear se. 85 Irregular Roots of the 1th, 4th, and 6th Classes §§ 247—250 .. see wee vee ces “ee eee “es 88 (6) Special Tenses of Roots with changeable special Base ( 2nd, 3rd, 5th, Tth, 8th, and 9¢% Classes) $5:291==200 wes i TEL HEY rt 90 Irregular Roots of the 2nd, 3rd, bth, Tih, 8th, and 9% Classes 38 266-296" ..." “..." .... ... 104 PB. General Tenser $8 207380 0, 0... i... 100 The intermedintc ® $298 ... FL." L.oit...0e,..0110 1. The Perfect §§ 299—330 ... .. .. -~ 111 (a) The Reduplicated Perfect §§ 301327 ws 112 (6) The Periphrastic Perfect §§ 328—330 ... ... 124 2. The Aorist §8.331-—3080. . .oe: sree fiserit ere) oe 126 (a) The Radical Aorist §§ 333344 epee 12% (0) The Sibilant-Aorist §§ 345—366 erg one 130 3. The two Futures §§ 367—377 0. ieee eee... 137 (a) The Simple Future §§ 368—372 ... ... ... 138 (6) The Periphrastic Future §§ 373—377... ... 141 .. ‘The Conditional §§ 378—379.. ... wi vei’... 143 5. The Benedictive §§ 380—383 ... +a vo ... 144 X CONTENTS. PAGE II. The Passive §§ 386—401 ... ... ... oe 148 A. The Present and Imperfect §§ 387. 390 . 148 B. The Perfect, the Aorist, the two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive §§391—401 149 Conjugation of rt. gy in Par., Atm, and Pass. § 402... 152 Alphabetical list of some irregular Verbs § 403 ... ... 157 II, Conjugation of Derivative Verbal Bases §§ 404—485 ... 168 1. Conjugation of the roots of the tenth class and of the Causal of all roots §§ 404—438... ... ... ... 168 A. The roots of the tenth class §§ 404—423 ... 168 DB. The Cousal 88 424-1438. we. (ies iors ives. »0e 178 . The Desiderative §§ 439436 ... ..c «: oe... 186 3. The Frequentative §§ 457—474 ... .. .. .. 197 Nominal Verbs §§ 475—485 ... ... ... . 206 Cnaprer VIIL—PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES §§ 486—490 ... ... ... wi] CHAPrER IX.—FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES $3 491-876. vin i 20s vee Syalliines Examen winere HOLE I. Derivative Nominal Bases §§ 194540 . orbit sell vou 215 1. Participles §§ 498—512 cad (@) Participles of the Present Tense §§ 198500... 216 (0) Participles of the Simple Future § 501 ... ... 218 (c) Participles of the Perfect §§ 502—505 ... ... 219 (d) The Past Participles §§ 506—512 ... ... ... 221 2, The Gerund $3 513-826..." ... ... ooo eee 'a0. 228 (@) The Gerund in &7 §§ 514—518... ... ... ... 228 {) The Germmd ing §§ 519-525... ... ... ... 232 ()) The Gerund in uy $526 ... ... .. .. .. 235 3. ‘The Infintiive §827 ... ee ¥ see aes or ven een 236 Verbal Adjectives §§ 528—538 ... .. .. .. 236 {a} The Verbal Adj. ings $529 ... u.. '. ~..793% (6) The Verbal Adj. in srfier §§ 530—531 ... ... 237 {2) The Verbal Adj. in §§ 553—538,.. ... "..."238 5. A list of other common Primary Suffixes § 539 ... 242 6. A list of the most common Secondary Suffixes § 540. 245 CONTENTS. x1 II. Compound Nominal Bases §§ 541—576 ... ... .. .. 247 1. Tatpurugha or Determinative Comp. §§ 547561, 252 (a) Dependent Determinative Comp. §§ 547—552. 252 (0) Appositional Determ, Comp. (Ta) 0 SESLAMTE A, § . 255 (c) Numeral Determ. n ovis 5 558—560. 257 2. Bahuvrihi or Attributive Compounds §§ 562—568. 259 3. Dvandva or Copulative Compounds §§ 569—573. 263 4, Avyayibhéva or Adverbial Compounds §§ 574—575. 264 CuaPTER X.—INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE §§ BTT—0646 ... ... bo Taki mre een 205 1. The Finite Verb §§ 578— 593 on men tne Teen ieee DOB (a) The Present Tense §§ 582—583 ... ... ... 267 (b) The three Past Tenses §§ 584—585 ... ... ... 268 (c) The two Futures § 586 ... ... .. .. .. 269 (d) The Imperative § 587 .. .. we .. ... 269 (¢) The Subjunctive § 588 ... ... .. .. .. 270 (f) The Potential §§ 589—591 .. .. .. .. 270 (9) The Conditional § 592 ... .. .. « .. 271 {%) The Benedictive § 393 wv ... ... .. .. 271 The Infinitive, Gerund, Participles, and Verbal Adjectives §§ 594—604 ver! mea aa yee ONY {z) The Infinitive $8} 593-597" ../“... ... ... 27] (0) The Gerunds in &g7 and 3 §§ 598—599 ... ... 272 ' (ey The Participles §§ 600—603 ... .. .. .. 273 (d) The Verbal Adjectives § 604 ... .. .. .. 274 3. The Cases of Nouns § 605—645 ... ... .. .. 274 (2) The’ Nominative § 607 /.../l.i i. (ao 0,. 275 (0) The Accusative § 608—613 ... .. .. .. 275 (c) The Instrumental §§ 614—619 ... ... ... .. 277 {?) The Dative § 620—62¢ .. .. .. .. ..279 (¢) The Ablative §§ 625—630... .. .. .. .. 280 (/) The Locative §§ 631—638... .. .. .. .. 282 {¢9) The Genitive §§ 639==B44 .... ... see ee wv O84 Number and Gender § 648... «evi ee Vane ilinee i283 ro vo SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. Ermer I Op felis CHAPTER I. THE LETTERS. 1.—The Nagart Alphabet. § 1. Sanskrit, the sacred as well as the learned language of India, is commonly written in the NAgari alphabet. This alphabet consists of the following letters i — (a) 13 vowel-signs:—S1 o, AT 4, T 4, y 4, Su, Rg Kr, Fri, & li, Too, T as, AY 0, Si We (6) 33 syllabic signs for the various consonants, each followed by the vowel a :— ® ka, a kha, N.o0: 3. gw FF. du; q cla, Bi ohh, vo Rovga, IZ Sha SN dia; Sw S "tha, F.d,. 8 die, MH a0; aq .da, 8. the, ] ida «Oe dba, nay 9g on, B® pha, HB ba, HW Dbha, H ma; qT ya, T “a QS In, ® uu; i ®; sha, 8 sha, B00, Luho (¢) Two signs for two nasal sounds, viz. Anusvara, denoted by, i. e. a dot placed above the letter after which Anusvira is pronounced (e. g. stg amsa), and Anundsika, denoted by 2, i. e. a dot within a semicircle placed ahove the letter after which Anunasika is pronounced ; and one sign for a strong spirant called Visarga, denoted by: i. e. two vertical dots placed after the letter after which Visarga is pronounced (e. g. A; gajah): : §2. (a) The vowel-signs in § 1 (a) denote only such vowels as are not preceded by a consonant in the same sentence or verse, i, e. they 2 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, (§ 3— denote the vowels which stand at the commencement of a sentence or verse, and those vowels in the middle of a sentence or verse which are preceded by another vowel ; e. g. sywaw abhavata ; QE sa dha. (b) Short a, following upon a consonant of the same sentence or verse, is not denoted at all; e. g. 7157: gajah. (¢) The other vowels, when following a consonant of the same sentence or verse, ara denoted thus: — dg 2 2 9» 4 wi M4 UB.ie ai: 0 iw by | FF 1 % Taig re ET) eg MEH T FF FT &8 FF War 9.6 kd ki kX ku kd Eri kyl ki ke hai ko kau Exception: The vowel ri, when following upon 7, is denoted by the initial sign sg 74; sgw=174. (See § 3 ¢.) § 8. (a). When any of the 33 syllabic signs in § 1 (5) is to denote a consonant which is not followed by any vowel and stands at the end of a sentence or verse, the sign —, called Virdma (i. e. ‘pause’ ), is placed under it ; e.g. FF kakup, TRIT abhavat, AH, ayn. (6) Two or more consonants which are not separated by a vowel or vewels are denoted by combinations of the syllabic signsin § 1 (0). These combinations are formed either by placing the succeeding’ Under the : preceding sign, leaving out the horizontal top-line of the former, or by placing the signs one after the other, leaving oub the vertical stroke of the preceding sign; e.g. g=pita; wm=Fkna; Fg=n da ; sq =chya; eq = t-snya. (Owing to the difficulty of printing, the Virdma is occasionally employed in combinations of consonants; e.g ges instead of IS yunkte.) (c) When the consonant r immediately Pragades another consonant or the vowel sg 74, it is denoted by the sign ° placed above the letter or combination of letters before which it is pronounced; e. g. ws arka, sie kdrtsnya. This sign for » is placed to the right of any other signs which may stand above the letter over which it has to be placed ; e.g. wor arkena, Wy arko, wk arkam. When r follows another consonant without the intervention of a vowel, it is denoted by the sign A placed under the consonant after which # is pronounced; e. g. ggg vajra, gag shukra. § 4. The changes which some letters undergo when they ars com. bined with other letters will appear from the following alphabetical list :— § 4] : THE LETTERS. 3 & b-ka, FG k-kha, © kta, HT kiya, HR k-t-ra, FH b-tva, ® lung, FH L-ma, FX kya, B or F kr-a, § blo, I ba, & k-sha, &H k-sh-ma; © Lhya, & kh-ra; Hq g-ya, T g-ra, ¥ g-r-ya; ¥ gh-na, =H Dh, Ho gh-ra; _ Enka, § kt, ® 7i-k-sha, g nb-sh-va, § n-ga, § r-gha; : © F ch-cha, BD ch-chha, TF ch-chh-ra, F ch-fia, TH ch-ma; BF chh-ya, B chh-ra; j-ja, SH j-jha, T j-ha, TT j-i-ya, SH joma, A jre; °F ji-cha, 3 fi-chha, SN @ija; F tla, E ita, 2 t-ya, = thys, 5 thre; § dgo, = dys; #1 dh-ya, & dhra; UZ n-fa, 98 n.tha, 98 n-da, UC n-dha, 907 or § nna, 9H n-mg, eh tha, A tta, XT ttya, A ttre, IF tive, tthe; a t-na, AT t-pa, | or A tra, 8 or 3 t-r-ya, | t-va, A t-sq, 9 th-ya; § d-ga, T d-da, & d-dha, J d-dh-ve, & dna, § d-ba, Z d-bha, = d-bh-ya, I d-ma, TA d-ya, X d-ra, A d-r-ya, & d-va, = d-v-ya, - W dha, £8 dh-ma, A dh-ra, ¥ dh-v; qa n-ta, vA n-t-ya, vq n-t-re, *X n-da, *x n-d-ra, 4 n-dha, " n.dh-ra, A n-na, A n-ra; : 4 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§5— H p-ta, A p-na, “A p-ma, A p-ra, F pla, & p-sa; = b-jo, 5] b-da, 9 b-dha, §.b-na, | b-ra; WT Dh-ne, ¥q bh-ya, A bh-ra; ® m-na, ¥ m-pa, ¥ m-ba, A m-ra, § m-la; Tq y-ya, TX y-va; Tru, Er, % o-ka, 9 r-dha; TF l-ka, TF l-pa, § Lo, loa; ® v-na, 3% v-ya, A v-ra; Ig or Fshu, B, or oht, T or X shri, For short, gh-cha, #9 sh-ch-ya, A sh-na, IW or *Hq sh-ya, A sh-ra, Yq gh-r-ya, X sh-la, q sh-va, 67 sh-v-ya; ® sh-ta, & sh-t-ya, § sh-t-ra, 8 sh-t-r-ya, § sh-t-va, H sh-tha, 99 sh-th-ya, SU sh-na, OF sh-n-ya, SH sh-ma; &h s-ka, TH s-kha, § sta, TH s-t-ya, T or | s-tra, TH s-t-va, © s-tha, © s-na, T s-pa, © s-ra; : & hf, T h-ri, § h-na, h-na, & k-ma, § h-ra, § k-la, § h-va § 5. (a) The sign s, called Avagraha (i. e. ‘separation, mark of sepa- ration’), is in many texts employed to indicate the elision of (short) & a after preceding ge or Hy 0; e.g. AWA te'bhavan; TrTISRR gajo'sti. " (b) The sign ° denotes an abbreviation; e. g. Fag achakshugha, gv ary, (acha) kshurbhydm ; qu° Pa(niniye). : (c) The signs of punctuation are | and |. § 6. The numeral figures are :— 2 R Ed Yo. in & Vie Q ° Ye 2 08 eB 8 (ged Beg iT go 10; 34 15; g¥3 143; =38¢ 268; ewe 1879. © 2,—Classification of the Lelters. § T. (a) Vowels are divided into :— (1) Simple vowels, &, oir, §, § 9, F, K; WK, F ond (2) Diphthongs, g, &, =, sit. (6) They are also divided into: — § 12.] THE LETTERS. 5 (L.) Short vowels, =1, g, §, =X, %; and (2.) Long vowels, a, §, %, 5; T, , SI, &T. § 8. Short vowels which are not followed by any consonant, or are followed by only one consonant, are prosodially short ; short vowels followed by combinations of two or more consonants and all long vowels are prosodially long. § 9. Vowels which differ in nothing but their quantity are called I vowels ; 31 and sr are homogeneous ; g and 2; g and 3%; =x and sg. § 10. Gupe and Viiddhi. The vowels gx, T, Ar, and the syllables | iS Fg are called Guna ; the vowels oT, q, a, and the syllables sr (and srg) are called Vriddhi. The relation of the Guna and Vriddhi vowels and syllables to the simple vowels will appear from the following table :— Simple V. 5 g&g 3&= | m& WE = Guna. oq y Hig 8g |Z Vriddhi. 3 q A | HAL (311) § 11. (a) Consonants are classified thus :— SURD. SONANT. Unaspirate.|Aspirate.|Sibilants|Unaspirate.|Aspirate.| Nasal.[Semivowels. Gutturals 5 g T | q T Palatals TI g T IT | q qT q ‘Linguals z T qT Tg | g oq | T Dentals q Iq q T | q Tq J Labials a % qT | Hq qa | 9 (b) The consonant & is a sonant aspirate, (¢) Vowels likewise are sonant. § 12. (a) The four semivowels 7, 7, 7, and correspond to the simple vowels g 5 3 &, XE, and &, respectively. . (b) The three semivowels 7, , and 7 are sometimes nasal, and they are then distinguished from the ordinary 7, &, and g by the sign for Anunisika (§ 1 ¢) which is placed over them (F,, and F). 6 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 13— CHAPTER II. RULES OF EUPHONY (Sandhs). A.—FINAL AND INITIAL LETTERS oF COMPLETE WORDS. § 13. A complete word ( which ought to be carefully distinguished from a verbal root or a nominal base ), when standing alone or at the end of a sentence or verse, may end in any vowel, except sg and g, or in one of the consonants §, 2, q, I, F, I, %, A, K, or Visarga. § 14. Words are not allowed to end in more consonants than one, except that they may end in one of the conjunct consonants #, Z, g, and §, provided both elements of these conjuncts are radical letters or substitutes for radical letters ; e. g. Nom. Sing. of the base Zit = =; 3. Sing. Imperf. Par. of rt. gs = AHR. § 15. A word, when standing alone or at the commencement of a sentence or verse, may begin with any vowel or consonant, except x, T, , A, I], Anusvira, or Visarga. § 16. When complete words are joined together so as to form a sentence or verse, their final and initial letters remain in some instances unchanged, but in the majority of cases the final of the preceding or the initial of the following word, or both, must undergo certain changes which are intended to facilitate the pronunciation. The rules which teach these changes are called the Rules of Euphony, or Rules of Sandhi. 1.—Contact of Final and Initial Vowels. § 17. In general, no hiatus (<.e. the succession of two vowels without an intervening consonant ) is allowed between two words. To avoid it, the final and initial vowels are made to coalesce, or the final vowel is changed to a semivowel, or the initial vowel is dropped. The special rules are :— § 18. Final simple vowels, short or long, unite with initial homo- geneous ( § 9) vowels, short or long, and form the corresponding long vowels ; 2. e.— FOr {T+ SF Or JT = WAT; e.g. WA + AE = AAME ; AFA + Aq, = AAT ; IT + aE = FFE. go g+yorg=g; ey af + gg = wef; ol» wft- aa; ad + 37 = TEE. For F+IOrFT=%|; ey. ATG + TE = GI; WG + = |qIgg:. ® + ® = XK; 00 7 + XI = FI. §24.] RULES OF EUPHONY. 7 § 19. Final sy and sqr unite with initial g org tow, with initial § or = to +, with initial sg to srg, with initial @ or @ to g, md with Sind Sir or J to i; e.g. — Fa + TEST = qA=S(; FT0 + T=V1= F237; FAT + TAX = JAAS; FT + IAT = AT; q+ FF: =qG:; FATE KW = qui; qT + oF = q39; a7 + ANE = qa; an + sens = etn; aq + siege = TAG. § 20. Final simple vowels, short or long, except & and’ str, before initial vowels not homogeneous with them are changed to the correspond- ing semivowels (§ 12 a); t.e.— ix g before &, «1, §, ¥, =X, T, T, uv, a, to 7; eg. gla + strg = AT; FW + I = gw; T+ = |r. 5 or 3 before s1, =m, , §, K, T, Q, A, WA, to q, eg. AY + ARA= wal®; 7g + 3g =Afag. = before or, 1, 3, §, 3, %, 4, F, of, of, tog; eg FH = FA; 9 + T = HAT § 21. Final g and =7y before initial sy remain nclinged, but the initial sy is dropped; e.g.— q + 9 = SA; TA + 9H = TAS. § 22. Final g and fy before any other initial vowel than at are changed to 1 and AF, or more commonly both to 3; the initial vowel is not changed. Z.g.— A+ Ea = SIE ,. 07 snore commonly § wa. a + re = arr, 1» 39 3 ad ga. Tt + gfe = El, sy » aaa. Note.—The hiatus resulting from the dropping of g and 7 in this and the next rule, and of Visarga in §§ 35 (c¢) and 36, remains; g HHT, etc. cannot be again combined. § 23. Final & and fy are before all initial vowels changed to qq and yr, or both to yr; the usual practice is to change & to |r, and HY to srg. The initial vowel remains unchanged. Z.g.— a= + ATE = TWAIN, or usually qET gma. : TW + IH = = SETH, noon AT TE a +3g= qifaE, sometimes qT gE. a + aq = an, 3 ” qr gd. : Exceptions: Bn, (a) Final a1 or 37 of a preposition unites with the initial ES of a verbal form to 1; e.g. w+ wIDA = mesfy. : 8 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 25— (b) Final or e171 of a preposition unites with an initial g and sy of a verbal form (except with the initial @ of forms derived from g ‘to go,’ and my ‘to grow’) to © and HY; e.9.— T+ CHa = 49a; T+ Ataf = frafr.—But stg + gfy = sfa. § 25. (a) &, &, and @, when final in dual forms and in sr#ft (Nom. Plur. Mase. of the demonstrative pronoun ggg), remain unchanged (pragrihya) before all initial vowels, and all initial vowels remain un- changed after them ; e.g.— fifi+3zg =fifrgg ‘two hills here.’ ff + Tat = fad Tar ‘these two hills.’ THT + 278: = (Hy srr: those horses.’ AI + ATR = WI ATA; AY F9G; od I€; IF 7A. qATAE gg © we two sacrifice here.’ Taq IT both sacrifice.’ ATT AF “you both sit here.’ (6) Interjections consisting of only one vowel and the final af} of particles remain unchanged, and initial vowels remain unchanged after them ; e.g. 31 + qe = = Ae; TTR; SET AYR. 2.—Contact of Final Vowels and Consonants with Initial Vowels and Consonants. (a.) Changes of Final Consonants. § 26. Surd finals can stand only before surd initials ; before sonant letters they are changed to the corresponding sonants, (Visarga generally to T), and before nasals to the nasal of their own class. Final dentals are generally assimilated to initial palatals and linguals, and final 3 to any initial consonant. The special rules are: — § 27. Final g, &, and g— (a) Before sonant letters are changed to af, §, and q respectively ; e.g. QFIF + IHH = FREY; GFF +agla = Tqaggia; gitar + TSX = qRATg=sd; FTL + TS = FFT. (0) Before nasals, however, final &, ¥, and gq are more commonly changed to g, uf, and ; e.g. GFF + Alea: = gratafea: by (a), or more commonly gri¥gfea:; qRac +a = qiRarg or qT ; FFI+ 7 = FFA OF FFA. (c) Before surd consonants final §, , and gq remain unchanged; e.g. GF, + 789 = ease; iar + fasfy = aRawfief; s3q+ PHT = FHI HT. § 30.] RULES OF EUPHONY. 9 § 28. Final g— (a) Before initial =x or g, is changed to = ; before 5 or gx, to 51; before & or , to T ; before g or g, to g ; and before F to F; e. 9. aq += =q9; aq + fealty =afeaty; qu+s@y=asEy; aq +H = AEFH; TA + TAI = TGA; AY + FIA = AGI. (6) Before the palatal sibilant gr final q is changed to <1 , after which the initial gr is commonly changed to g ;e. ¢. IF + ATAY = ATATEAF, or ITT. . (¢) Before the remaining surd consonants final g remains unchanged ; e. 9. AF + FAQ = THU; Tq + fel = afwela; ag+ weg = AHH; AY + TTI = TEE. (d) Before the remaining sonant consonants and before vowels final g is changed to IT; ¢9 qa + wely = agefa; ag + msi = AFBI ; AF + AH = TEA; A + WI = IgA. (¢) But before nasals final g is more commonly changed to 3; e.g. aq + gafy = gaia by (4), or more commonly qgafa; AT + goag, = qEray or FGI. § 29. Final & and gp— (@) Are doubled when preceded by a short vowel and followed by any initial vowel; e.g. gaF + AR = TATE 3 GI + gia =ga famfy. (See § 30 a). (b) Otherwise final g and up remain unchanged ; e. g. q1F + Af = grefi; mig + fasfa = mefief; a + &@ = mig; gag + Tel = gIunssia ; GA + F = GATE ; GAY + FH = FIAIEH § 30. Final g— (a) Is doubled when preceded by a short vowel and followed by any initial vowel ; e. g. ga +e = gafae. But HAT + 8 = WaAl- faz. (See § 29 a). (0) Before 5, 77, and zg, final I is changed to 31 ; before g and g, to uy ; and before g to the nasal g, i.e. to &. After sy the initial zx may he changed to g. £. g. AT + SAT, = IFAT; q+ TAA = AAT or AISPAA; AT + TFA = ASFA; AT, + SIH = ARIE - (c) Between final q and initial = org, org, and gor gr, the corresponding sibilants gr, ¥, and @ are inserted (2. e. gr before or g, wy before z or g, g before g or of), and before them the final 3 is changed to Anusvira; e.g. qm +I =qiF; AL +IFHE= Ate; qm + g = aig. (d) Before vowels ( except where (a) is applicable ) and before the remaining consonants final § remains unchanged ; e.g. qr + &E = 2% 10 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 31— AAT; A + TAT = qed ; aw + Wd = aed; ar + IN = EIN; A+ T= qd; qr + arta = qa; qe + ee = FYE; AE + J: = TTF; q+ T = ATE. § 31. Final g— (@) Before initial vowels remains unchanged ; e.g. gq + svg = JAE ; OF + TF = aA. (6) Before sibilants, and before g and ¢, final T is changed to Anusvira; eg. E+ AIA =q AFH; TH+ = dasagt+ T= d §; a7 + fa = a af. (c) Before any other consonant final 3 may be changed to Anusvira, or it may be changed to the nasal of the class to which the initial con- sonant belongs, (to ¥, &, 7 before 7, &, 3.) The usual practice is to change 37 before all consonants to Anusvira. Z.g. stg + FH = 9g FAM (or AEFAW ); FH + T= = (or wigw) ; sEgy + famifr = sr fad (or wigfraet®; swe + Et = oF Manfa (or sERYaIRy ); sey + afew = oid afew (or sigdafa). § 32. Final i remains unchanged before all initial letters ; e.g. wag + Af = FAS ; FAL + FA = FAH. § 33. Final Visarga, preceded by any vowel— (e) Remains unchanged before initial surd gutturals and labials (FT, | )5 09 TH + FAT = TE FAR; IT: + FA = go: FA ; TA: + Ff = FO. (b) Before sibilants, final Visarga may remain unchanged, or it may be assimilated to the following sibilant; e. g. TT: + 9% = THAT: qe or JTHISE 3 TW: + WEA = TH: HE OF THEE ; TT: + |: = go q: or gATE:. (¢) Before sx or g, T org, and gor of, final Visarga is changed to the corresponding sibilants gr, ¥, and g respectively ; e. g. TA: + = = (WH ; TA: + § = THE 3 9: + g = ggg; Ten +g = weg. § 34. Final Visarga, preceded by any vowel except st or =, is changed to T before any sonant letter; but this is dropped before , and a preceding short vowel islengthened. Z. g. gf: + 33 = ties; Ig: + K¥: = TgRY ; AY: + T=Bfa= Ags; T+ we = of wwe. Exception : The final Visarga of aqy: ¢ O, Ho, ’ is dropped before all sonant letters; e. g. qr + T= = a = ; a + TFA = qr TH FAH. § 35. Final a:, when standing for original stg— (@) Is changed to ft before all sonant consonants ; e. g. Ta: ( for THR) + TeBfy = UE Tesh ; OR: + af = aE gai. Pim gis ih iI] - § 40. ] RULES OF EUPHONY, A gro A Bry oil pr “nd OTN (b) It is changed to sy also before initial sr; the initial wf itself is dropped. E.g. 3m: + wifiq = yt sf. (c) Before all other initial vowels s7:, when standing for original wd, becomes &; e.g. TH: + TET = TH Ig; TH: + IAM9 = TAH IAT. § 36. Final 31:, when standing for original s1ra, becomes at before all sonant letters; e.g. star: (for sama) + 17 = FAT WA; WAT + g% = WATE; WAL + qEfca = wan garafea. § 37. The final Visarga of 31: and 311: , when standing for original , is changed to T before all sonant letters; before an initial g that final is dropped and preceding ¥f is lengthened. Z.g. ga: (for gay) + «rx = gawd; ga: + 3g = gake; IT + Tesfa = gas; ga + A = gat wa; gr: (for gro) + oi = gWA; g1: + 281 = green; gh + [= = gr R=. Note.—In special combinations final Visarga after penultimate 37 is changed to g, and after penultimate g or § to §, before surd gutturals and labials. Instances of this change will be drawn attention to, (5) Changes of Initial Consonants. § 38. Initial g— (a) After a final short vowel, and after the particles ®t and sy, must be changed to =F; e.g. qq + SAT = TT WMT; AT + fora = Aa Roa; or + sega = Jared. (6) After a final long vowel, g may optionally be changed to wg; e.g- AT + fal = an fgafw or a Haw. § 39. Initial T after final a, g, T, and g, being substitutes for %, €, qd, and q by § 27 (@) and § 28 (d), is commonly changed to 1, 7, q and 3 respectively ; e.g. GFF + T = FIG Or commonly FI; a7 + & = gE or ag; TRAE + = TRAE or RATS; FFL ET = FFE OF TFA. : § 40. (a) The initial (dental) 5 of verbal roots is generally changed to (lingual) uy after the (lingual) T of the prepositions sr=g: (zr=aD), iH: (faz), qT, QE, o, and after 7: (30) ; e.g. QR + Tafa = qitu- afd; 7 + AgH = FFE; F + Far = qoiar. (b) The initial 5 of Fg ‘to dance,’ Jeg ‘to rejoice,’ ag ‘to roar’ and of a few other less common roots remains unchanged; e. g. gr + FAA = ga. (¢) The initial of zy ¢ to perish’ remains unchanged, when the final 3 is changed to wg; e.g. 7 + qf = quzafa; but 7 + 9g: = gaw:. (d) After the prepositions mentioned under (a) the 3 of the preposi- tion fa is changed to by before Tg, AL, 99, and certain other roots; e.g. gforrafa, arial. 12 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 41— § 41. (a) The initial gf of many verbal roots is changed to w after prepositions ending in g and §, and after fa: and zh e.g. 4 + d&hgfa = fafa; sf + fafa = afafagi; «fr + a= afi; + @aq = faa. (b) The initial g of roots which contain a zg, 5, or T, remains gene- rally unchanged ; e.g. fy + gree (from rt. x) = Frwwey; f+ gad (from rt. a) = fagafy; fr + sot (from rt. 37) = felon B.—CuANGES oF FINAL LETTERS OF NOMINAL AND VERBAL BASES AND INITIAL LETTERS OF TERMINATIONS, AND OF OTHER LETTERS IN THE INTERIOR OF WORDS. § 42. The special rules for the changes which take place when final letters of nominal and verbal bases come in contact with initial letters of terminations will be given under the heads of Declension, Conjuga- tion, &c. Here only the most general rules are noticed. § 43. In the interior of a simple word no hiatus (see § 17) is allow- ed, except in fggs ‘a sieve.’ § 44. The rules laid down in §§ 18-20 apply generally also to the final letters of bases and the initial letters of terminations; e.g. Hq + St = Wan; 3 Shledl To = RTedl; Fed + 3 = Fd 3 Fed + 3M = Feat; AM + T = AA; AG + 7 = qe. § 45. Final g, g, and 3, &, especially when they are radical vowels, are sometimes changed to go and 37 before terminations commencing with a vowel ; e.g. gt + wtfeq = faafa; ft + 3 = fafy; g + afeq = gata; q+ 3 = gf § 46. Radical g and g, followed by radical or 7, are generally lengthened when g or 7 are followed by another consonant; e. g. fg + aif = dan; fg + fie = wife; ge + fre = qf. § 47. TFinal'radical sg is sometimes changed to 3, or, when preceded by more consonants than one, to IT; e. 9. & + Tq = FAT; *@ + I = WIA. § 48. Final radical 5g before terminations beginning with a vowel is generally changed to TE, before terminations beginning with a consonant, to 3T; when sg is preceded by a labial letter, it is changed to IT and Fg respectively. Z. g. F + afar = fafa; F + Jy = FA; fog + wife = fagafa; fag + a = freee, § 49. Final q, g, =, and a, before terminations commencing with a vowel or TL are mostly changed to Aq, AY, Aq, and sr respec- tively; e.g. F + 9 = FAT; T+ = A; M+ T= ALY; A+ SC = qT 3; WY + 7 = a=. § 55.] RULES OF EUPHONY. 13 § 50. Before initial vowels, semivowels, and nasals of terminations final consonants of nominal and verbal bases remain generally un- changed ; v. ggg +u=gd; Fg+fu=dfw; gg + a = gaa; Sr tinE fd ; AFA + 37 = HEAT. § 51. When a termination begins with any other consonant than a semivowel or nasal, the following rules apply :— (¢) Final surd consonants before initial sonant consonants become sonant ; e.g. FH +37: = AEE: ; FOIE + FH = FATIH. (6) Final sonant consonants before initial surd consonants become, surd ; eg. Hg + g = qaigeg ; 9g + fa = wif. (¢) Final aspirate consonants are changed to the corresponding surd unaspirates before initial surd consonants, and to the corresponding sonant unaspirates before initial sonant consonants ; c.g. gq +g = ggg ; afawy + fir: = sifdmtye. (d) Final palatal consonants (including gr), ¥, and g are com- monly changed to , a, or to % ; eg. arta = = gifiar: 5 3&3 + fa =wftw: ; gz + fn = gefy ; game + fi = genfys; fog +h =fafy:; er +g="fog. (¢) Final g is changed to Visarga, or to T, or it is dropped ; sg is changed to aft before sonant consonants; e. g. Ag +g =HTG or acy; Wiad + Br = sith; am +a =a; Jaa fn = RAI. § 52. Of two or more conjunct consonants which meet at the end of a word, generally (see § 14) only the first is retained, the others being dropped ; e.g. FRA +A=F&L; FIL +A=FIA +A (by 51 ¢) =ggq; wg + q = AT; but FH += Fa +a (by § 31d and 0) = Fg. § 53. When thefinal sonant aspirates g, g , 9,3, or g are changed to unaspirate letters, and when the syllable which originally ended with g, qT, q, 9, or g, commences with one of the sonant unaspirate letters ar, TT, or q, the latter are changed to the aspirate g, +, or 37, res- pectively ; eg. gg+g=ga +g by §61lc)=9gqg; ggra=g% + g=yz+a=gg iyi) § 54. g in the interior of a simple word after a vowel is changed to =g ; e.g. rt. oT, Imperf. stfegaq, Perf. f=oe; ot. gg, Perf. qu=z. § 55. [Initial g and of of terminations after somant aspirates are changed tog; eg. sq+a=—wq+ta=asq (§ ble); weg +o = & + gq =&g.. 14 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 56— § 56. Initial dentals of terminations after final linguals of bases are changed to the corresponding linguals; eg. gg + J =22 (§510); fra+fa=fag+fa (§ 51 4) = aft gata=ge; ggt+afa = CEES 3 57. §, when immediately preceded by = or 7, is changed to sy; c.g. ATL + AT = ITT; IL + T = IT. § 58. Dental q, provided it be followed by a vowel or by one of the consonants J, Hq, Iq, I, is changed to lingual uf, when it is preceded by =g, &, T, or §, either immediately or separated from these letters by vowel, gutturals, labials, of, q, g, or Anusvira ; eg. FF + AY = FINE; FT + A = FON; FAG + A= HHO 5 TE + AT = HEIN 3 TH, Instr. Sing. gryor; 3, Instr. Sing. 2qor; gg + IA = guortfer 5 JF + Arf = gfe. But qt + avg = qratang; wd, Instr. Sing. AI. § 59. The sibilant g of a suffix or termination, provided it be fol- lowed by a vowel, or by a dental consonant, or by 3 or 7 or 7, is changed to ff, when it is preceded by %, T, §, or by any vowel except 1 and 3, either immediately or separated from it by Visarga or an inserted Anusvira; eg. FAQ +FG=FASY; I+ FAR +F=ATY; TL +f =ax+afa= FEA 5 AF+g= wig; Wg +g = 91g; fag + oi = Safar; ai: +g = afey or giqey; agg, Nom. Plur. ef (§§89 and 67) ; but gg + § = gg (§ 163). CHAPTER III. DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. § 60. The Declension of Adjectives does not, in general, differ from that of Substantives. § 61. Nouns substantive and adjective have three Genders, amas- culine gender, a feminine gender, and a neuter gender. The gender of substantives must be learnt from the dictionary. Adjectives assume the gender of the substantives which they qualify. § 62. Nouns substantive and adjective are given in the dictionary in their base or erude form. Whenever an adjective assumes in the feminine a base different from that whichit hasin the masculine gender, its masculine base is given in the dictionary, and the feminine base is derived from the masculine base by the addition of a feminine suffix ; e.g. Fog ‘ beloved,’ Fem. base Freq + AT = &H1+aT; faq ¢ wealthy,’ § 67.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 15 Fem. base qa +g = ufat. The neuter base of adjectives is generally the same as the masculine base. § 63. Declension consists in the addition to the base of certain ter- minations which denote the various cases in the different numbers. § 64. (0) Nouns substantive and adjective have three Numbers, a singular number, a dual number, and a plural number. The dual number denotes ¢ two.’ Z.g. Base star ‘horse,’ Sing. spay: ‘a horse,’ Dual s1a7t ¢ two horses,” Plur. sgsgy: © horses.’ (6) A few nouns are used in the Plural only; apg: Fem. Plu. ¢ water’ ; gryr: Mase. Plur. ¢a wife’. § 65. There are eight Cases in each number; viz. Nominative ( N.), Accusative ( Ac.), Instrumental (I.), Dative (D.), Ablative (Ab.) Genitive (G.), Locative (L.), and Vocative (V.) The meaning of the Instrumental is in English expressed by such prepositions as ‘by, with, by means of ;’ the meaning of the Ablative by such prepositions as ‘away from, from ; the meaning of the Locative is generally expressed by ‘in’ or ‘at.’ § 66. Table of Case-terminations added to masculine and feminine bases — Sing. Dual. Plur. Rite |) Aq qe (de. 99). Ac. oq att A: (ie. AA). i wm IT 7: (ie. 99). D © I ihe. ¥IH). Ab. 30: (;,¥E®) $F Wi (he. ¥E), G. (jo a) AT (ie.30g) 0A, 1. % WA: (ie. AMG) EF. The termination of the N. Sing. is always dropped after bases ending in consonants (see § 52). The Vocative is generally like the Nomi- native. § 67. The same terminations are added to neuter bases, except in the N., Ac., and V. of all numbers. No termination is added to neuter bases (except those in 27) in the N., Ac., and V. Sing. ; in the N., Ac., and V. Dual § is added instead of oft ; in the N., Ac., and V. Plur. g is 16 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 68— added instead of a7:, and a nasal is inserted before the final of bases ending in consonants, except those that end in a nasal or semivowel. (As will appear from the paradigms, the inserted nasal belongs to the same class as the final consonant ; before sibilants and T it is Anusvara). § 68. The above terminations undergo various changes, especially when added to bases ending in vowels ; these changes are best learnt from the paradigms given under the various declensions. § 69. Terminations beginning with consonants may for convenience sake be called consonantal terminations, terminations beginning with vowels vowel-terminations. § 70. According to the final letter of the base the Declension of nouns substantive and adjective is divided into :— A.—Declension of bases ending in consonants or Declension of Consonantal Bases (Decl. I.—XI.); and B.—Declension of bases ending in vowels or Declension of Vowel bases (Decl. XII.—X VIL.) Consonantal Bases are subdivided into— 1. Unchangeable Bases, i.e. Bases which either undergo no change at all (Decl. I.), or undergo generally only such changes as ave required by the rules of Sandhi ( Decl. II.—V.); and 2. Changeable Bases, ¢.c. Bases which in their declension show a strong and a weak form, or a strong, a middle, and a weakest form (Decl. VI.XI.). A. CONSONANTAL BASES. 1.—UNcHANGEABLE BaAsts. DECLENSION 1. Bases ending in op and g. § 71. Sandhi :— 1. z may optionally be inserted between the final gf of a base and the termination g of the L. Plur. 2. After final i the termination g of the L. Plur. is changed to 7 (§ 59). § 72. Paradigms : grog m.f.n. © counting well,” Fareg maf. ‘naming the goddess Lakshmi or the lotus.’ § 72.] Base : N.V. Ac. Ab. G. N. V. Ae L.D: Ab. GL. N: V, Ae, D. Ab. Sing. N. V. Ac. Dual N. V. Ac. Plar. No¥V. Ac, The remaining cases are like those of the Masc, Sing. I. gum, waar; D. gad, we ; do. 3s aia | gay ATT gor go: gaTfor got Gave, Gao: gor: gaa: gay: gy gg or qgivzg sugan Singular. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. PHT Masc. and Fem. sugan ( § 52) RAG SUGAN-CM, sugan-a sugan-c sugan-al. sugam-1 Dual. sSuGan-a sugamn-bhydam HHSHH sugam-ol Plural, sugan-al sugan-bhih, sugan-bhyal. SUGan-Gin SUG n-81 Or sugan-f-sin Neuter. GU sugan GI sugan-t ~ . qT sugan-t FAS FHS HHS FHS: FAS FHS 3 FAS: hHG: FAST: FHS: FAST FATT HH on FHS FHS 17 kamal kamal ( § 52) kamal-am Lamal-é kamal-e kamal-al kamal-v kamal-aw kamal-bhydm kamal-oh kamal-ah. kamal-bDhah kamal-Dliyah. kamal-dm bumal-shu kamal kamal-t kamal, and Fem. ; e. g. 18 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§73— DECLENSION 11. Bases ending (for the most part) in radical consonants other than nasals and semivowels ; viz. — @) Bases nn § GAL TETTE ALT TE I Ws (0) Bases in TANI; (c) Bases ing. (@)—Bases ending in F GAL TET TE AY EL, 9%9Y.- $§ 73. Sandhi— 1. Before vowel-terminations the final of the base remains un- changed ( § 50). 2. In the N. and V, Sing. Masc. and Fem., and in the N,, V., and Ac. Sing. Neut. final 5, &, 7, F become g, final , g, §, g become z, final q, of, g, of become q, and final gq, g, a, 3 become q (§ 51). 3. In the L. Plur. finals are treated as in the N. Sing. (§51 ) ; subse- quently the termination g is after changed to g (§ 59), and gq may optionally be inserted between final g and the termination g. 4. Before the terminations fiy:, ¥o:, and ory final &, , I, 7 be- come If, final &, ¥, §, § become ¥, final q, o, TT, 9 become T, and final q, g, a, 3 become gp (§ 51). 5. When final gq, g, i or 3 by rules 2, 3, and 4 are changed to F, T,q,qLortow, ,g, Tq, § 53 must be observed. § 74 Paradigms: fg=afae m. f. n. ¢ conquering all J’ sifgrmey m. f. ¢ kindling fire ;’ TAFE m. f. n. ¢ dispelling darkness ; gZq nu. f. n. ‘fight- ing well ;” q@gy m. f. n. ‘knowing thelaw ; gazrg m. f. n. ‘almighty.’ Base : trata afmy qAEE Mase. and Fem. Singular. N.V. frat afm. EEA Ac, frafwen wfmgn age 1 ferfaar afar AEE D. REST wad AEE Ab. G. feat: AA: JAF: 1) fer frte afrafy awd § 74.] N.V Ac. LL.D AL. G. L Sing. N. V. Ac. Dual N. V. Ac. Pw. N. V. Ae. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. The rest like Mase. and Fem, Base: NY. Ac. Ab. G. frsrfsar tore feataamy «fren fasrisar: ATA: Plural. faerie: arf: fasafste: tate: tartan ATE: fratyary witaayy fafa wig Neuter. frie ARTHAT fea faeT Atay fregfaica arfirafer 31 THI Masc. and Fem. Singular. Q 871 TA g79q THI IT THI gI4 THT gg: THT: gay HI aI qATF qATHT qIE aE : ERED 20 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 7T5— Dudl. N.V.Ac. @IH aR FATEH! I.D.Ab. IAW SAE, WEI G.L gg: qAgdAT: AW: Plural N.V.Ac. gg€: THT: qIF: 1 g3fe: gafF: Faia: D. Ab. gga: RYE: FAI: G. FIA qATA, HAART T 39 THY SERIE Neuter. Sing. N.V. Ac. JIA GUA. "AWE Dual N. V. Ac. GH qa FAH Plur. N,V. Ae. @Jfea quale SERIES The rest like Masc. and Fem. § 75. Decline: gfig m. f. n. ‘green,’ like fersafara; HEF m- ‘ wind,’ like fasfsreyr in Masc. ; Tag f ‘a stone,’ like THT | in Fem. ; FF S ‘a region, like ggg in Fem. (rit labial for dental). (0.)—Bases ending in 5, FK, FL, T, FT. § 76. Sandhi.— 1. Before vowel-terminations the final of the base remains unchanged (§ 50); but final g may optionally be changed to zr; (observe § 54). 2. In all the remaining cases— (a) Final 57 is changed to %; and the base is then declined as a base ending in g, (6) Final 5 is changed to g; but when the final § forms part of the roots gx ‘to emit, to create’ (except in gf. ‘a garland,’ Sing. N. S77. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 21 g% dc), gq ‘to cleanse,’ ayy (contracted into ger) © to sacrifice,’ (except in sgfeqsy m. ‘an officiating priest,’ Sing. N. sgfeqs &c.), T= ‘to shine, to govern,’ 3 ‘to shine,’ and as the final of gE 7m. “a religious mendicant,’ it is changed to ¥. Afterwards the bases are declined as bases ending in g and E respectively. (¢) Final gr is changed to g ; but when forming part of the roots farsr ¢ to point,” z3x ¢ to see,” wy3y © to touch,’ and FIL ‘ to stroke,’ it is changed to g ; and when forming part of the root qr ¢ to perish,’ it is changed optionally either to & or to g. Afterwards the bases are declined as bases ending in Z or in F, (4) Final q is changed to &, except in ggg 7. f. 2. ‘bold,’ where it is changed to f. The bases are afterwards declined as bases ending in Z and respectively. (¢) Final g is changed to z , and the base is then declined as a base ending in T, § 77. Examples: The N., V., and Ac. Sing., and the I.and L. Plur. of the Masc. and Fem., and the N., V., Ac. Sing., Dual, and Plur. of the Neuter of the following paradigms : gargs, m. f. =. ‘ speaking the truth ; ATG, m. f. n. ‘ eating the rest ;’ fgsggsy m. f. n. ‘creating the universe ;’ fase m. f. n. ‘entering ;’ gz m. J- mn. ¢well-looking ;’ gr m. f. nm. ¢ perishing;’ fgq m. f. n. ‘hating ; FI mm. fo nC bold J regu or FEFATRL Mm. f. n. ‘inquiring about a word’. Base: @AATT ATH frogs oD ~ ~ Masc. and Fem. Sing. N.V. @FaE A9E Frags Sing. Ae. WAAAY [TYTH frags Plur. I. gaia: agate: feral Plur. LL. qq ATE |g or "gTg Base : fora gz «0 Masc. and Fem. on Sing. N.V. faz gT% AZ or AE Sing. Ac, fara gzaq qIH 22 Plur. 1. Plur. L. Base : Sing. NV. Sing, Ac. Plu. 1. Plur. L. Base: Sing. N. V. Ae. Dual N. V. Ae. Plur. N. V. Ac. Base : Sing. N. V. Ae. Dual N..V. Ae, Plur, N. V. Ae. Base: Sing. N. Vale. Dual N. V. Ac. Plur, N. V. Ac, SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. fafy: gel: fg or frzg gg 5 TIT Mase. and Fem. sz Tz fo TIT, AEE Fata: fog or frzeg 79g wwe, STE Neuter. qIAE ATIE qegart ATS qa Ae fara. gTa Neuter. fz gTE {aft geal fat ger fs yy Neuter. fz TY ff Taft AC) fy i371 arg: or AM: Hg or tg, or WY SEAT or JSTATT ASTATZ ‘=F or WTI EEE: arg or AEG ag or a% 3 Cie TEA or TETATA, FEATE GIES or “araft ‘qif¥® or Sif § 81.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 23 § 78. Decline: gr=r f° ‘speech,’ like gary in Fem. ; fates me. ‘a physician,’ like ztygsy in Mase. ; Xx J ‘adizease like gs in Fem; gus mm. ‘a king, like fasygs in Mase. faxr f. ‘direction,’ like gz in Fem. ; fay J. ‘splendour,’ like {gy in Fem. § 79. Irregular bases : sriRra f. ‘a blessing,’ and qIT m. ‘a com- panion.’ | Singular. Dual. Plural. N.V. raf: |: x forte adr Sr qu: Ac. STTRTTH ETH ii IL sqfdrer = fe) = D. «IY /AY Ab, STAT: GIT: | G. STHT: AI: Lo otarr |qi ey 3R or or ofiy "MY (c.)—DBases ending in g. § 80. Sandhi:— 1. Before vowel-terminations the final z remains unchanged (§ 50). 2. In all the remaining cases, (a) T is changed to g; (0) but when final in a root which commences with , and in funy f. a particular kind of metre, g is changed tog; (c) w hen for ming p: part of the roots 3% ‘to hate, gg ‘to faint,’ faz ‘to love’ and q]E ‘to spue,’ g may optionally be changed to g or to g; (4) and when for ming part of the root Fg ‘to bind,’ it is changed to ¥. Afterwards the bases are declined as bases originally ending in g, T, or 4. § 81. Examples: The N., V., and Ac. Sing., and the I. and L. Plur. of the Masc. and Fem., and the N. V. Ac. Sing., Dual, and Plur. of the Neuter of the following paradigms : fag m. f. n. ‘licking ;’ gz m. f. n. 24, SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 82— ‘hiding,’ FE m. f. n. ‘milking ;’ gg m Jn ‘hating,’ gqmag Sf ‘a shoe.’ Base: EF 1 I; Zt SLICE Masc. and Fem. Fem. TT ii Sine Sno N.V, (2 7 4% WZ odF TOE ND: Sing. Ac. fogq NEY gE TEA SATE H, Plur. 1. fats: REE gi: PAE or gia SATA: Plur. L, fog 139g 98 4g ogg SOwg or or or LLC Cc BE Neuter. Sg. N.V.Ac.TéZ gz 9% YT or ¥% Du. NVA Rll wit of gdh PL N.V. Ac. fof fr 3k IR § 82. Irregular base: gurETg m. a name of Indra, changes its g@ to § whenever its final T is changed ; e. 9. N. V. garam, but Ac. goiar- TH, 1. guar &e. DECLENSION III. Bases ending in € § 83. Sandhi:-— 1. The final is changed to Visarga in the N. and V. Sing. Mase. and Fem., and in the N., V., and Ac. Sing. Neut. 2. In all other cases it remains unchanged (§ 50). 3. Penultimate g and 3 are lengthened in the N. and V. Sing. Masc. and Fem., and in the N,, V., and Ac, Sing. Neut.,, and before all consonantal terminations (§ 46). 4. The termination g of the L. Plur. is changed to g (§ 59). § 84. Paradigms: fir f. ‘speech ;’ gy f. ‘a town; qr¥ nn. ¢ water.’ § 85] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 25 Base : fg 97 qT Singular. N.V. Tre q: ars Ac. wg. 93 qr: 5 fiw qr FT D. fire TX TR Ab. G. fre: RAE qT: L, fi qf¥ qr Dual. N. V, Ac. fry qT ay I D. Ab. Area TIT, FTEAT. o.L firs TT: Ie: Plural, N.V. Ac. fire q3: AR I afta: Tri: arta: D. Ab. fred: TH: AE: G. fr, RAL: rq, L rg 3 Gl DECLENSION 1V. Bases ending in the suffives gq, fg, and fag (Mase. and Newt). § 85. Sandi :— 1. Before vowel-terminations the final J of the base remains un- changed (§ 50 ), except when it is changed to up by § 58. 2. Before consonantal terminations final J is dropped ; the termi- nation g of the L. Plur. becomes g ( § 59). 3. The final is dropped in the N. Sing. Masc., and the N. and Ac. Sing. Neut., and optionally in the V. Sing. Neut. 4. The penultimate g is lengthened in the N. Sing. Masc., and in the N., V.,.and Ac. Plur, Neut. 4s 26 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [ § 86— § 86. Paradigms : qfaq m. n. * possessed of riches; figs m. n. : i > ¢ wearing a garland. Base: gfe ®RET Jere, "qETT Masculine. Neuter, : Singular. a N. qi HET | Av gfe, afta | we Li I gfwar Elgon D, fers fray | ADO aide: or like Mase, L. gata &faior ; V. eT #ghaT af ora gig owe Dual. N.V. Ae. OF wien gftlt afraf LD. Ab. ofa SOTEIH | G.L afr ala | Plural. N.V. Ac. gfaa: fig gle HET I gf: Ean | D. Ab. A, ia Lids a. qiqarg |g ) qf Hay | § 87. The Feminine base of nouns which follow this declension is formed by the addition of the feminine suffix g to the masculine base ; e. 9. gfe , Fem. base qf; gfigs, Fem. base yfigofy ; it is declined like qf (§ 141). § 89.1 DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 27 DECLENSION V. Bases ending in the suffives Aq , TA , end IQ . § 88. Sandhi i— 1. The final q is changed to Visarga in the N. and V. Sing. Mas, and Fem., and the N,, V., and Ac. Sing. Neut. 92. Before vowel-terminations the g of 3g remains unchanged (§ 50), but the @ of 3g and gg becomes g (§ 59). r 3. Before fiy:, ¥7:, and 373, 1g is changed to off, ga to gT , and 3g to IT. 4. The termination g of the L. Plur. remains unchanged after sig, while the @ of stg may optionally either remain g or be changed to Visarga. After Tq and gy the termination g must be changed to g (§ 59), and the @ of gg and gg must be changed, either to g, or to Visarga. 5. The wt of sre is lengthened in the N. Sing. Masc. and Fem. ; and «8,9 of 1g, zd, Iq are lengthened in the N., V., and Ac. Plur. Neut. § 89. Paradigms: gaa Mm Jon. “well-minded ; gzfag nm. f. 2. ‘ flaring upwards ; saegq m. J. ©. ¢eyeless, blind.’ Base: GAME IIA AGH GATE Z(G ATH Masc. and Fem. Neuter. Aen ge re ——————eee——, Singular. N. gaan syd wed: \ Ac. GUAEH SAT ATI | I GARE SFETr HTT D. @AAE SEY wad Ab. G. GARE: IFAT: HFGT: | like Mase. and Fem, ot A L gaat sgl staal Vv. gaa: wglu SE HHA: Ira: A]: 28 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 90— Dual A LQ 2 a of A o N.V.Ac. GHAHAT SHERI HAT qT GAAHT SHERI HAFAN o Q ID.Ab. GHAI “(v0 “grag ; “ 2 like Masc. and Fem, G.L. gawd: Saul: See: Do Plural. N.V.Ac GARE: SIAM: ATG: GAA sgt sraregf I gaan: sgl D. Ab, GARNET: SFAvA: ATG: G. guaa SET THEA 7 gATEg SIfEnY w=gsY or or or (a gAAg Sgtdmy wag like Mase. and Fem, § 90. Decline : g=gHE mM. ‘ the moon,’ like gag in Masc. ; qed fo ‘a nymph,’ like gag in Fem. ; ggg ‘ water,’ like gag in Neut. ; stag 7 ‘light,’ like gzfag in Neut. ; agg 7 ‘the Yajurveda, ’ like STAGE in Neut. $01. I rreqular bases : RE Mm. © time,” and g&a3g 7, & name of Indra, drop Visarga in the N. Sing. : S®gT, EIT; ITA M.; a proper name, does the same (N. Sing. 3741), and forms the V. Sing, either IFA, OF IA, OF INA, - 2.—CHANGEABLE BASES. § 92. In the first five declensions the base remains, so far as it is not affected by the rules of Sandhi, nearly always one and the same throughout all cases. In the remaining declensions of consonantal bases the base has generally two forms, a strong base and a weak base. The weak base is usually that which is given in the dictionary ; the strong base is formed from it by lengthening of the penultimate vowel, or by the insertion of a nasal before the final consonant, &c. ; e, g. Weak base HHT ~~ aq AEA TET &e. Strong base HAY, Wa, HEFT, TQAE &e. § 98.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 29 § 93. Some nouns have three bases, a strong base, a middle base, and a weakest base. Here usually the middle base is given in the dictionary. If we strengthen it, e. g. by lengthening its penultimate vowel, or by the insertion of a nasal, we obtain the strong base ; if we weaken it, e. g. by the elision of the penultimate vowel, or by contracting two of its letters into one, we obtain the weakest base ; e.g. Middle base WW 1 TW THY de Strong base ~~ HEIL HMM ~~ FAM TIF &e Weakest base HH TT 1A Jers &e. § 94. Nouns with two bases, i.e. a strong base and a weak base : The strong base is used in the strong cases, the weak base in the weak cases. (¢) The strong cases ‘are the Nom. and Acc. Sing., the Nom. and Ace. Dual, and the Nom. (not the Acc.) Plur. in Mase. and Fem., and the Nom. and Acc. Plur, in Neut. (6) All the remaining cases ( except the Vocatives ) in Masc., Fem., and Neut. are weak. § 95. Nouns with three bases, i.e. a strong base, a middle base, and a weakest base: The strong base is used in the strong cases, the middle base in the middle cases, and the weakest base in the weakest cases. (ae) The strong cases are, as before, the Nom. and Acc. Sing., the Nom. and Ace. Dual, and the Nom. ( not the Ace.) Plur. in Masc. and Fem., and the Nom. and Ace. Plur, in Neut. (6) Of the remaining cases those the terminations of which begin with consonants (i.e. the I. D. Ab. Dual, and the I. D. Ab. and Loc. Plur., in Masc., Fem., and Neut.), and the Nom. and Acc. Sing. Neut. are middle cases. (¢) All the remaining cases (except the Vocatives) ave weakest cases. § 96. The Voc. Dual and Plur. in Masc.,, Fem., and Neut. are always like the Nominatives. The Voc. Sing. is sometimes like the Nom, Sing, and has sometimes a peculiar form of its own. It can neither be called strong, nor middle, nor weak. DECLENRSION VI. Comparative bases in gg ( Mase. and Neut.). § 97. Two bases. strong base ending in zig; weak base ending in Iq. § 98. Sandhi:— 1. In the N. Sing. Masc. gig becomes 19; in all other strong cases it remains unchanged. 30 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [$99 97 In the weak cases the base in gag is treated like a base in stg of Declension V. 3. In the V. Sing, Masc. gag becomes gg. The V. Sing. Neut. is like the N. Sing. Neut, § 99. Paradigm : Egg Mm. ww ‘ heavier. Strong Base : UEiRIcy Weak Base: Taq Masculine. Singular. Dual. Plural. N. THAT seem TA: po raat a Ao oo Ela. faa: I TFET | TOA: D. TTH TOA TAT: Ab. Tiaa: | TATE: G. Thad: ¥o.o aaa 5 ar: : L rate J The or TET:F V. Tha afarEt are: Neuter. N.V. Ac. TT: Tid TEI ~ The rest like Mase. § 100. The Feminine base is formed by the addition of the feminine suffix & to the weak base ; e.g. frag , Fem. base qrfraa ;it is declined like aay (§ 141). DECLENSION VII. Participle bases in sg (Mase. and Nei.) § 101. Two bases : strong base ending in grag ; weak base ending iri ic § 102. Sandh -— 1. In the N. Sing. Mase. req becomes AT (§ 92); mall other strong cases it remains unchanged. § 104.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 31 2. In the weak cases the base in wi is treated like a base in q of Declension II. 3. The V. Sing. Masc. and Neut. is like the N. § 103. Insertion of § before the final q of the base in the Nom., dec., and Voc. Dual Neut. : I. a must be inserted before the final g of the base in Participles of the Present tense Pav. of roots of the Ist, 4th, and 10th classes, and of causal, desiderative, and nominal verbs ; ¢. g. grgedt ; Steady ; AT A= ; Fret ; FATE? 3 gH. { 2. may optionally be inserted before the final g of the base in Participles of the Present tense Par. of roots of the 6th class, and of roots in 37 of the 2nd class; and in Participles of the Fut. Par. in TI Or 6; € g- IAT OF GFA 3 ATAT OF AT=AT ; FTAA or greyed 5 FiTAdt or FRET. 3. sis never inserted in the remaining Participles of the Present tense Par. ; e. 9. sgl; gaat; ead; IAA; Fadl; Hoar. § 104. Paradigms : grqq m. n. ¢ knowing; AF mn. n. eating’ ; JTF, m. n, ‘ going J’ rEg Mm. 7. ‘ one who will give.’ Strong Base: AGFA ged Aw Ind Weak Base: TTT. ATA JT TET Masculine. Singular. N.V. IT HTT rT FEIT Ac. qgeqg ~~ dgeqq ATFaq greFeaq I. ATAT FIAT rar FTEar D. ard HT ard ITEqd Ab. G. qga: erga: 1a: Trea: te Frafa sald arta greafa Dual. N,V. Au died weedy mee. ETERS LD. Ab. TIA HATH IA TEE aT Far: JEar: gran gregar: 32 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 105— Plural. N. V. aga: erga: qeq: FRI: Ac. FI: HI: qa: Freda: L qatE: ogi: aifg: gals: D. Ab. TIF: ATA ATE: TEA: G. AIA AGA IQ EIA L. qag ATG ag IEA Neuter. Sg. N.V. Ac. ara qIq qq FEI Du. N.V. Ac. atgedl Iga ITA or IEAAT or ITeel FTEI=AT PLN V. Ac. Siuss wgfea aifea greafea The rest like Mase. § 105. The Feminine base of these Participles is formed by the addition of the fem. suffix g, 7 being inserted as in the N, Ac. V. Dual of the Neut. (§ 103); e.g. gra, Fem. base qe ; HTq, Fem. base rgd; gia, Fem. base Frey or qTeal; SEFd, Fem. base grexrdt or greedy. The Fem. base is declined like qf (§ 141). § 106. Participles of the Present tense Par. of roots of the 3rd ( or reduplicating) class and the five Participles sage eating,’ Sra ¢ waking, gfzq ‘ being poor, THE,‘ shining,’ and zrrge ‘ command. ing’ have no strong base, and are therefore in Masc. and Neut. declined exactly like nouns in g of Decl. II. The insertion of 7 before the final gin N. V. Ac. Plur. Neut. is, however, optional. Z. g. gga nm. n. « giving,” STH Mm. ne Waking'— Masculine, Singular. Dual. Plural. Nv yay SE ZZ ile ow oe Gt fad St (77 a § 111.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 33 Neuter. Singular. Dual. Plural. ~ N,V.Ac. TRG SHA @Edi SrAdqr axa sma or or Zala wEta Fem. base gat, strat, do. § 107. gzg m. nn. great, and ggg m. ‘a deer,” a. ‘a drop of water,’ nre declined like stzer; e. 0. Mase, Sing. N. V, FEY, Ac, grad , I gzar, &e. Tem. base gad. § 108. ggg m. n. ¢ great’ differs in its declension from srg only by lengthening its penultimate @f in the strong cases ;e. g. Mase, Sing. N. #&™, Vv. ATT, Ac. HEA, 1. #zat, &c.; Neut. N. V. Ae. Sing. gz, Du. #gdfi, Pl. #zifeq. Fem. base gg. DECLENSION VIII. Bases ending in the suffices qq and ge ( Masc. and Newt). § 109, 7hwo bases : strong base ending in gag , F7q ; Weak base end- ing in 7 , AF. § 110. Sandhi -— . 1, In the N. Sing. Masc. qq and T= become HIT and EICY (§52); in all other strong cases they remain unchanged, 2. In the weak cases the bases in gq and gq are treated like HTT (Decl. VII. 3. The V, Sing. Masc. ends in ga, 9; the V. Sing. Neut,. is like the N. Sing. Neut. § 111. Paradigms : Stag m. n. ‘intelligent ;’ faaraa m. nn pos sessed of knowledge.’ Strong B. dias ATA HAF Ea Weak B. mq FEE Taq. EE Masculine. Neuter. mes — r—————— —— ——— Singular. N. fra FEE) W _ FHT Ac. draeay (Farag { 5 iia 34 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§112= Singular. 1 fiaar (EEE D. fray faemEd Ab. G. fa: Prema: ike Mose, L frafq Femara V. fiw fea HA EE Dual, N. V. Ac. dasa fermaear Hradt fara L D. Ab. drag fFeaam | G.L fwd fmede | eee Plural. N.V. fimeq: fae: I Lol lie 1 Ac. dma: frame: L frafg: faa: D. Ab. twa: (EEE: | nil, G. Hfraary faEEan L. dqimg [Fama | § 112. The Fem. base is formed by the addition of the fem. suffix g to the weak base; e. g. firma, Fem. base «fret ; fama, Fem. base farerraefy ; it is declined like | (§ 141). § 113. yg, used as an honorific pronoun in the sense of your honour,’ is declined like fara, and differs therefore in the N. Sing. Masc. and the N. V. Ac. Dual Neut. from the participle wg ¢ being, which follows gga; ( Decl. VIL). N. Sing. Mase. HT, ¢ your honour ;* yx ¢ being.’ WN. V. Ae. Dy, Noub. a8} oi oomi 3 WEE 5 The feminine base of sg ‘your honour’ is 3x4, of wag ¢ being’ H+ ; both are declined like waft (§ 141). § 116.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 35 DECLENSION IX. Bases ending in the suffizes HY, A, and gq (Mase. and Neut.; rarely Lem.) § 114, (¢) Nouns ending in A and Faq immediately preceded by a consonant have two bases, a strong base ending in #17, and a weak base ending in &1; e. g. HAH, strong base STRAT, weak base Seq. (b) Other nouns in gq and gq and all nouns in wg have three bases, a strong base ending in 1, a middle base ending in #7, and a weakest base ending in 5 e. g. dH, strong base gfi\ry, middle base dH, weakest base gfygr. The Loc. Sing. Masc., Fem., and Neut., and the N. V, Ac. Dual Neut. of these nouns may however optionally be formed from the middle base in Hq. § 115. Sandhi .— 1. In the N. Sing. Masc. and Fem. HI, AF, and am become ar, AT, and gr; in all other strong cases they remain unchanged. 2. Inthe N, and Ac, Sing. Neut. the final q of HT, AY, and Fe is dropped. 3. The final 77 is also dropped before all consonantal terminations. 4, The Voc. Sing. Masc. and Fem, is like the weak or middle base; the Voc. Sing. Neut, may be like the weak or middle base, or like the Nom. Sing. Neut. 5. The final I of the base is liable to be changed to a and to sy by the influence of preceding letters ( §§ 58; 57). § 116. Paradigms. (a) ARHG, m. ‘soul’ Fsggx m. ‘a sacrificer s&, 7. ‘the Supreme Being’ qad 7. ‘a joint. Strong B. SAA ~~ ITT HEAT qarT Weak B. SI[@F IT HEAT qa Masc. Neut. "7 A ~ re ee —— Singular. N. sr ey k a qa A, ATA FST 36 N. V. Ac, 1. D. AD. Gg. 1, N.V, D. Ab. G. L. SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, ATH ATA ATH: TTA STAT a JTATAT STAIN. SATHATS ATA: ERICH ATA: HATA! ATA. AAG Singular, AST HOTT FST FEN AST: HE: ITT efor 599. FET or TE Dual, SEC ISTE] AGHA, AsqA: FEO: Plural. IST | Sil AST FAW: FE: qsAVT: AST: ISIAH. SEH 59g FEAT [§ 116— < CEL qoy qT: gator S o qe" or 9 qT qEEAT, SN CELE (0) Ts me ‘a king; ard, m. ‘a carpenter Hw J. ‘a boundary; qmRA, 7 ‘a name’ Strong B. Middle B. Weakest B. Ac. TATT, AAT USAT, qT TT qT Masc. Singular, [ST Sil TIAA qT 4, 4, 4, HN 5 A 5 ™S 5 M qrqr qrArag AMAT ATHT ATH Neut, Lae | § 117.) DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 37 Singular. I ar qe HET qrEt D. qs qT HE qa Ab. G. TE: qeor: Hare ATH: L. | TE or TE on ifr or wife or SIC qa Hale qa V. UIT TIT fra AMT or AH Dual. N.V.Ac GERy: gaol el 0 sreitorsmdy LD. Ab EEN QFE WEEE, ATHEET al EI TEI: HE: IH: Llural. N.V. AT JA HEA Ac. a: qe HIE: a L. aie: qgie: dene AIAN: D. AD. TAL: JIVE: |E¥T: Js: Gl UIE qq HWE AHH, Fh Tg 945 qag qEg § 117. The Feminine base of simple nouns in #1 1s, where it exists, formed by the addition of the fem. suflix § to the weakest base; e. g. ag, Fem. base qrsft ‘a queen,’ declined like at (§ 141). Some nouns in FJ have an optional base in #7; e.g. besides iw there exists also gir, declined like reg (§ 131). Some nouns in Tq. form their feminine base by the addition of the fem. suftix 3, before which the final & is changed to T; e.g., gigq ‘fat, Fem. base gigs, declined like gt (§ 141). Bahuvrihi compounds ending in nouns'of this declen- sion have the feminine like the masculine base, or they form a new feminine base in st, declined like rear (§ 131); when the final mem- ber of the Bahuvrihi has three bases (§ 114 4), the feminine base may also be formed in zg and is then declined like qf (§ 141). Z.g. quad, Fem. hase EER or guar; FZUAT, Fem, base FEA, OF FZTAT oF FFT. 38 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 118— Irregular bases. § 118. guy m, AAT m., two proper names, and bases ending in gf ‘slaying’ (derived from, and in form identical with, the root gg ‘to slay’), which also follow this declension, form only the N. Sing. Masc. Fem. and the N. V. Ac. Plur. Neut. from the strong base in sry; all the other strong cases are formed from the middle base in sg. When- ever the penultimate e1 of ga is dropped, gis changed to g, and J is not liable to be changed to of. Z. g. Masc. Neut. Sing. N. qr STIAT ECE TdT Sing. Ac. qVNY ~~ WIAUY ~~ FAEUH. TAG Sing. I. qs WERT AAT THT Phar. N. rrr ECE ERI] Plur Ae. tomes S50: | mgm FAI Plur. 1 Fela: FFE: The Fem. base of gage is gx#fi, declined like Tt (§ 141). § 119. AA m. ‘a horse,” forms the Nom. Sing. regularly ar; all other cases are formed from gq, declined like gq { Decl. VIL). E. g. Sing. Ac. stgeqq, I. waar, D. waa, &c. § 120. Hq nm. ‘a dog,” FFF 7. a name of Indra, and gag mn ‘young,’ form their strong and middle cases regularly from the strong bases a119, AIT, Jar, and from the middle bases s173, FIST , IAT; their weakest cases are formed from the weakest bases a, AT, 7. Eg. Dual N.V. Ae. AY ATT om. TA 0. I D.Ab. EI, FEA, aL Al AT: Sing. N. WAAT, Ac, AIA, I. FAYAT, &e. The optional base gay is declined regularly like fama (Decl. VIIIL.). The Fem. bases of qq, and HEFT are STAT and FIAT, declined like qa (§ 141); that of REE is gafa, declined like #fg (§ 136), or Fad, declined like aft (§ 141). § 124.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 39 § 121. sg ne ‘a day ;’ strong base stgT ; middle base Sgy or HTH; weakest base 31g. Singular. Dual. Plural. N.V. Ac. WE: (i.c. WEY) HART or AGA SEW 1 HET ETO: D. TR | AETEATT, WENA: Ab. HE: ) HET: G. TF ! : HZ AF: L. wfg or gf EX or HAT:F DECLENSION X. DPerfect-Participle bases in gg ( Mase. and Neud.). § 122. Tlwee bases : strong base ending in gig ; middle base ending in gq; weakest base ending in gq (for gg; § 59.) § 123. Sandi — 1. In the N. Sing. Mase. zig becomes arg; in all other strong cases it remains unchanged before the terminations. 2. The middle base in gq is treated like a base in gq of Decl. IT. 9 3. In the weakest cases gg remains unchanged before the termina- tions. If the suffix g@ was added by means of the intermediate g, this g is dropped before gu; if final 3 of a root was changed to q before qq, the original 37 reappears before 3g, Radical vowels are in general treated before gg just as they are treated before the termination 3: of the Red. Perfect (§ 307). 4. The Voc. Sing. Masc. ends in gq, the Voc. Sing. Neut. is like the Nom. Sing. Neut. § 124. Paradigms: fggg m. n. ‘knowing ;’ qfigag m. 1. or JAA, m. mn. ‘one who has gone ;’ fefrargg m. 7. ‘one who has led;’ srya® m. mn. ‘one who has heard.’ Strong B. Tagte Sftwaie swear fasta gaia Middle B. fagd «fwaq wweaq faeaq goa Weakest B. f1g9, S797 svgy faegy gam 40 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. Masculine. Singular. fag sftrara sore falar ggaT Ac. Tagtag siftgateq sueaiqq (adEiay gaia I Ager JE Sega WEN gam D. IE 9 Igy Say fea THIN Ab. G. fagw: svge: svgw: fAegw mAw % mE wm sgl feel gaan v. figa <@fwg sweaw fadigs gaa Dual. N.V. Ac. fagiat sifaatar sueaiar faded yaar LD. Ab. (aga SURI, Sean fata zing, Taare G.L fag: vgs svg: faegen gan Plural. N.V. figi|: SEwai@: sera: fade: gaa: Ac. few: Seg: Teg: (ART: EEE 1 fagfa: FEIT AT - or fra or a 9 Ab | (Bm wm div: age G. Jor fam: or wa: frag wag | Brat: qa: orf orga, a | fy uy or or or WAT ot 64 48 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 144— § 144. Tiregular base : fy f. ‘a woman.’ Singular. Dual. Plural. Noh ] Ag, farang or rq | Y fam | B ( faa: | faa: or &fi ie 3 nD. fa3 sean | ae: Ab. | 43 va: ‘ =r: 2 4 oon | Eto Vo ou NETETIY, T&T: | wf y, Hy fara fara: DECLENSION XV, Monosyllabic Mase. and Fem, bases in &1, 3, Fi, (derived from roofs without the addition of any visible swfix,) when used at the end of Tatpurushe compounds. § 145. These bases take the same terminations that are added to consonantal bases ; before vowel-terminations the final syyis dropped (except in strong cases ), and final z and 3 are changed to Tq and Ts when immediately preceded by one radical consonant, and to gg and 3g, when preceded by more radical consonants. The Voc. Sing. is like the Nom. Sing. § 146. Paradigms: fy=gqr m. f. ‘protecting the universe; sygefy m. f. ‘one who thinks pure things’; gag m. f. ‘a sweeper; Fg=y m- f. one who buys grain,’ Masc. and Fem, Base: Tapert gt TY ATH Singular. N.V. fg Tg: IT: ATH: Ae. forqumg AFCA], @IWH, FACET L ferry AGE FEAT THAT § 149.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 49 Singular. D. foray TGA TEA qatHy Ab. G. Fag: AEE: TB: TA: 3 fy Ela TIieq FAH Dual. | NV. Ae Bradt @gelt @ewlt gafedr I D. Ab. FEraaneqrg, sgefivamg FIYNAT] FAHY G.L, ~~ fooqdn AEE: GSE: ICHAT: Plural. %, frogaiy: ggdifa: wwii TIE: D. Ab. fgared: ggdiva: @IT¥I: gas: G. fraq. ASA, we, JaeEa I frag AFT BIT ATA § 147. Irregular bases: Bases ending with & ‘leading’ take in the L. Sing. the termination sqray instead of ZT; ¢ gy. graf ‘one who leads a village, a chief,” L. Sing. raver. DECLENSION XVI. Bases ending in 3 ( Mase. and Neut., rarely Fem.) (a)—=K changeable to HTT. § 148. Nouns derived from roots by means of the suffix g and de noting an agent, like gg mm. ‘a maker,” and qg m. ‘a grandson,’ “«qa/ 5 a < ‘a sister,” Wg nm. ‘a husband,” (etymologically ‘a supporter’) change their final 5g in the strong cases Masc, and Fem. (except the N. Sing.) to HIT. § i Pay adigns FG m. nw. ‘a maker ;’ gg f. ‘a sister.’ Ss 50 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 150— Mase. Neut. Fem. Singular. N. FA ! wh Tar Ac FATU EET] L wall FFI ETE D. wd FI qe AbnG iG THe FI: Eg: L FA For qi v. Fa: (Lc. FIL) FG or FO: &F@: (1.0.8GY) Dual. N.V.Ac. &aId Foil Fa ID.Ab. HIYA FEIT, FETA G. L. Fal: FON: FN: Plural. N. V. BRIT. TEI Ac. FI § 7 SEE I. Fru: Fgh: TER D. Ab. TER FET TEE G. FAG, FA, SER L. FY FT =a § 150. The Feminine base of the nouns in g which denote an agent is formed by the addition of the feminine suflix to the masculine base ; ¢. 9. &q, Fem. base df; it is declined like afi (§ 141). (b)—s3K changeable to QT. § 151. Nouns topromive of relationship like fgg mn. ‘a father,” @rg J- ‘a mother,’ 37 m. ‘a husband’s brother,” &c. (except those mentioned in § 148) change their final 3g in the strong cases (except the N. Sing.) to HL; eg fgg m. ‘a father,’ arg J. ‘a mother’— Sa § 153.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 51 Sing. Dual. Plus, N. far q1ar | Vv. faa(ie. qa ) AA faa Arad ff HAT Ac. fag a fra amg: The remaining cases are like those of Fg m., and @g (§ 149). § 152. Irregular base: gf m. ‘a man,’ which is otherwise declined like fgg, forms in the G. Plur. FOI, or qo, DECLENSION XVII. Bases ending in &, a7, and Hy. § 163. Paradigms: F m. * wealth ;” @fy m. £. a bull,’ ¢a cow ;’ #} f. ¢ a ship.’ Base: 3 i) at Singular. N. V. a: ae At: Ac. TI Hq |qrayq. L Tan qT ara D. aa Ty CIC] Ab. C. qa: re qa: L Tt fy arta Dual. N,V, Avast TTY Tray arat 1.D. Ab THY TAT rang G1, AT: Tr: ara: Plural. NV. aa: Ma: EIER Ac, aa: nr: dre: I afi: aif Afar: D: Ab. TIE Aree avy G. Taq TET qr L. ag 0 1 qq 52 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 154— A Uist of some wregular bases not mentioned in the preceding paragraphs. § 154. HAGE 7. ‘an ox,” forms the strong cases (except the N. Sing.) from AAG, the middle cases from JAZ, and the weakest cases from HAGE. Sing. Dual. Plu. N AASTT AACE: % 3 SATE | =] . Ac waged | | Taig: I AAZET | AATIR: D. AAT | wagAW | eo. Ab. J a Ade: L wage | Xan JAG v. wag AAZIEN FATE: The Fem. of ATL is Ag or HAZE ‘a cow,’ declined like TE § 141) § 155. Hq f. ‘water, is declined only in the Plural (§ 64 5): N. V. args, Ac. wg, LL sifyg:, D. Ab. stay, G. any, L Tg § 156. HY m, ‘a jackal,” has two bases, FY and HE; the base YY i is used in all except the strong cases, and Stine like ag § 136); ; the base FE is used in all strong cases and in the weakest cases of the Sing, 2 Dual, and declined like Fg 72. (§ 149). Sung. Dual. Plus. N. mgr Yon FIT - | ert | rev Ac. WENA J | FET I. SRIZAT or AGT lo Fgh: D. SET or SE Zs Les, B : THT: Ab | Siran din boty 0% , : ? : > G. | lion Ss | x . | SRI LA pdm. BITTE | dy Vv. ®m FIL FIT: ‘ Fen. of HIE is ig ‘the female of a jackal,’ declined like at )- § 160.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS, 53 § 157. Sqr f. ‘old age,’ is declined regularly throughout, like req Jf. (§ 131); but it may also optionally form all cases the terminations of which begin with a vowel from the base ggg, declined like gaa J. (§ 89); e. g. Sing. N. only Jig; Ac. Fry or ww@; Plur. I. only slay; G. SRroTTe, or FFT, do. - § 158. fxg f. ‘the sky’ Sing. Dual. Pluy. NY. : 7 i wt Le Ac TH J Gt) Tea fram IY OND | Y | fa afi | | fan: est r— NS — o— 1 EE] J § 159. rg n. (varely m.) ‘an arm,’ is declined regularly through- out, its final @ being changed to Visarga in the N. Ac. V. Sing. (or, when Masc., only in the N. and V.), to gq before vowel-terminations, to before the terminations fi: ¥a:, and 9, and to Visarga or wg in the L. Plur. ; but it may also optionally form all cases except the N. Sing. Du. Plur. and the Ac. Sing. Du. from gg, declined accord- ing to Decl. IX. ; e. g. Sing. Dual. Plu. N. ar: (n. and m.) | Son wl ( UE] 7. ZIT: mm. = N S97 2. FHT m. - ~ Ac, qt nn. MY m. J | =N., or IE: m. I INT orJISOM STRAT or ZITAT SrlsTior FTTH: L. ITY or Freer 2190: or FIEOTT: 0: or FreY or or ZIT 7d. § 160. qfag m. “a road,” forms the strong cages (except the N. Sing.) from geyry, the middle cases from gfe, and the weakest cases from ger. 54 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 161— Sing. Dual. Ply, N.V. ol | ns | gee: Ac. gery | aux IL. qT aff: ig - p : qe qEEIT i : qe; Qo aati! | aur L qf J : J afiay § 161. qrg m. ‘foot,’ used as the last member of compounds, forms the weakest cases from gg; e. g. garg nm. ‘one who has good feet’ — = = Sing. Dual. Plur. N.V. gua | 2 | gg: Ac. gaTgq, ( gat gu: L gar RIE gars: &e. The Fem. is either like the Masc., or a new Fem. base is formed by the addition of the Fem. suffix g to the base in gg; e.g. Fem, base gat, declined like af (§ 141). § 162. qrg m. ‘foot,’ and ggg n. ‘heart’ are declined regularly throughout, like greg m. nn. (§ 131); but they may also optionally form all cases except the N. Sing. Du, Plur., and the Ac. Sing. Du, from gg and gg, declined according to Decl. IL. ; e. g. Sing. Dual. Plur. N. Qi: qren: : | ard Boi Ac. 91EH J | 9rEr or ga: IL 939 or UE GEIR or TEI GEior af: &e. Sing. N. Ac. gza¥y, I. g3aq or gar, D. gza1x or g7 etc. § 163. gg mu. ‘a man,’ forms the strong cases from gag, the middle cases from ga, and the weakest cases from ga. § 165.) DECLENSION OF NOUNS, ; 55 Sing. Dual. Plu, a TR ET Ac gala fr | ga: I gar qe: qa aE | nt nd a qq: qa . «nN * | ga 9g (§ 59). * Do ND gf J . TAT, qHIET quia: § 164. gasff ‘a widow remarried,’ is declined like ay (§ 141) except in the Ac. Sing., where it forms ga¥ga, and in the Ac. Plur. which is ga¥: ; G. Plur. AY. § 165. guft mf. ‘a person possessed of good intellect, an intelligent person,’ and gy m. f. ‘@ person with beautiful eye-brows,’ are declined o\ thus :i— Singular. Masc. Fem. mmm ee rr Ze ~ Nv. git: gp gh gu: Ac. gia, gad. gia Iq L goat gga gear gar rs) 0 oD = J D. gra gga gid or gag gd or @9a Ab. G. gira: gga: FEA: or GIA: GAor GAT L. giufs gafa gto gia ggftogyam Dual. Masc. and Fem. mm eee, N.V. Ac. GREIT gy LD. Ab. gefivam gyn G.L gen gyn 56 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 166— Plural. Masc. Fem. N.V.Ac. Gla: gga: gem gga: L gd: gyn: gH: gyi: D. Ab. gered: gy: godin: FIA: GC. GRE gaa, gle or HAT gar or GEO, L. | wim vayy SY ga § 166. wag m. ‘the self-existent one,’ a name of Brahman, &e., is declined like gag m. (§ 146), except that it changes its final 3 before vowel-terminations not to g, but to FF; €. 9. Bing, N,V, |AH:, Ac. maga, 1. agar de. § 167. Suffizes added to nominal bases to express the meanings of cases. (@) The suffix gg is sometimes added to the base of a noun to ex- press the sense of the Ablative case; e.g. zg: ‘from the village 7 FEA: ‘from the real state of the case, in reality; srgraq: ‘from ignorance.’ (b) The suffix q is used similarly to denote the meaning of the Tocative case, but it is generally added only to pronouns and pronominal adjectives ; e. g. qq ‘there’ (§194); gaa ‘everywhere.’ § 168. A few nouns, such as ®¥ ‘heaven,’ Faq ‘a year of an era,’ &e., are indeclinable. CHAPTER IV. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. (a )—By means of the secondary suffixes gg and JH. § 169. The Comparative degree of adjectives is formed by the addition to their masculine base of the suffix gg (Masc. and Neut. base ; ar Fem. base), the Superlative degree by the addition to their mas- culine base of the suffix gg (Masc. and Neut. base ; ggr Fem. base); e.g. oF dear 7 Comp. fra « dearer ; Superl. SrIaw © dearest.’ RIE ‘pagel AAT ¢ purer +i ArATH ‘ purest.’ TE ‘heavy; , THAT fheavier: |, J&EIH heaviest. § 1731] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 57 § 170. Adjectives which follow Decl. II. change their final conso- nant before gg and qx as they change it in the N. Sing. ; the final 7 of adjectives in gq is dropped; final srg remains unchanged ; final gq and 3g are changed to gg and gy, after which the q of gg and qq becomes € (356); eg. forte Comp. raf Superl. fai, arf , AtwwEry afi. THT 3 , Eg; , JEIGYA. qT; , ggg . gga. HTT 3 . aHyE , augad, qgarLy 2 QIAAWL; AIAG. qe 3 ; qi 3 , afaad. GHA 3 . gaaEry i, maweym, vgiaq 7 Sefunso | "afew § 171. Adjectives which in their declension show two bases, assume before gg and gy their weak base ; those with three bases assume be- fore gq and ga their middle base ; in both cases their final consonant undergoes before gg and gy the same changes which it undergoes before the termination g of the L. Plur. ; e. g. fq; Comp. AAT; Superl. fra. fag4 3 ; fag vo THEE, qr 5 vo EIT , STE TAT . TEA , TIE. § 172. The suffixes gg and gw may also be added to verbal forms and to indeclinables ; when added to verbs, they always appear in the form of gray and gaTH, and they do the same if the new word derived from an indeclinable is used adverbially. Z.g. gafg ‘he cooks; TARA ‘he cooks better ;’ qafaqaTa ¢ he cooks best ;—3%: ‘high; IHG, ¢ higher,’ IATA, ‘highest,’ both used as adverbs; but THEATE: ‘the highest tree.’ (b)—By means of the primary suffixes 399 and gg. § 173. Many adjectives may optionally form their Comparative degree by the addition of the suffix ggg (Masc. and Neut. base; qd Fem. base) and their Superlative degree by the addition of the suffix 8s 58 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 174— zg (Mase. and Neut. base; ggr Fem. base ). The difference between at, qa and $94, TU is this, that, whereas gz and gw are added to the masculine base of the adjective, gg and gg are commonly added to the root from which the adjective has been derived, the vowel of the root being gunated. £. g. {zag ¢ quick’ (from rt. 279); Comp. Afra Superl. ats, - oT firm’ (from rt. IT ); > ©) E wg, I& ‘wide (from rt. T % 9 Taq 3 0 aR, Optionally fara, farsaw; Ravay, Rawaw; Igaw, I&aH. § 174. The following are some special rules for the addition of 399 and gg : (a) The final vowel of a masculine base which contains more than one syllable, or its final consonant together with the vowel preceding it, are dropped ; e. g. qq ‘wicked; Comp. qa Superl. qTYS. qZ .... ‘clever? qTd 3 w afew, TEA ‘great; , WEAH , WES. (0) The possessive suffixes {eq Tq, fa, &c., are dropped ; when the remainder of the base thereupon consists of only one syllable, it undergoes no change, except that its final resumes its original form ; but when the remainder of the base contains more than one syllable, rule («) is applicable to it; e. g. afigq Ce. aHIAT) ‘wearing a garland;’ Comp. &sfig®; Sup. give. qqqT (ie qT+aq ) ‘possessed of wealth’ ,, gdmgE; , wide. FgAd (ie ag +7) ‘possessed of wealthy ,, g&figg; , af. (¢) Tie. 7a is substituted for the vowel sg of a base, when =x is preceded by an initial consonant and immediately followed by only one consonant ; e. g. HA ‘lean; Comp. FA 3 Superl. EAE] . ge ‘hard; 5 FIA 3 ” Zee. 9d “broad ¢ oi ue 3 3 ate. qr ‘much ; > TATA 3 » iy. qT ‘softy ads. | AE, 3 but RST ‘straight; mags 0, RIVE, § 176.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 59 § 175. Alphabetical list of some irregular Comparatives and Super- latives :(— Aras Te] 4% 8 a TIE TY SEES) fora qg a) gg KAR qT q€ TIE WT RET ga § 176. ¢ ’ near; ‘small; ¢ 2 mean ; ‘heavy; ‘long; fs ‘praiseworthy ; ‘dear; ‘much; ‘manifold; ¢ 2 young ’ ‘flrmy ‘old; ¢ 3 2 great; ¢ o? great; ‘large; short; Comp. » 3» 2» 2» » » » » » CEEGE Superl, afrs. ”» wks or Flag. * Ais, afvs, HIER Flag, ag or The suffixes gg and gy are sometimes added to compara- tives and superlatives in ggg and gg; ¢. 9. IAAF, FHIAT; qifve, qIigay, qIAEad; AY, SFA ‘the very best. * Compare h=dTle 7 Compare qr 60 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 177— CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS, PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, AND THEIR DECLENSION. 1.— Personal Pronouns. § 177. Bases: — 1, syme ‘I;’ special base for the Singular, ®F. 2. FW ‘thou ;’ special base for the Singular, &ga, = = The declension of these two pronouns is the same in all the three genders. wgy l; HA or AI HqAT qq or H Hq 4 Hq or { qt HEATH“ we two; EN HEA or «Tl ATATEATT. AEH or A ATATHATH, » A HTAT: or AT STH: Singular, Dual, IH ‘thon. ATH or
Tmert., ne Pot., g Pree. Lh & Simple Aorist, Condit. Redupl. Perfect, Pres. Imperat. Fut, & Begedict. Par. Atm. Par. Atm. Par. Atm, Par. Aim. HL = g uR ¥ ¥ Rony d £42 & 8. dD. mivee §..B = 3. fa iin, = ¥ aw § §E stl wan)ed. wow 8, 30. 90 ATS S42 uo (yg) Wy qE WUE WY: WH J AE Fla @E a am WEE wg WE WER J(lm@)ar a =k 7 .a2 um mg = 2. 9 3 L.& rd Ww. HF a JH HY eq 3 TC Wg |, FAIR Note .—Terminations beginning with consonants may be called con- sonantal terminations, terminations beginning with vowels vowel- terminations. ’ ; ‘ ¥ i Augment and Reduplication. § 228. In order to save repetition, we give here the general rules concerning the Augment and the Reduplication of roots, § 229. (a) The Augment, (¢.e. ‘increase’) consists in the vowel A, prefixed to the root; e. g. . rt. JE ‘tostrike; Impf. Par, AFIT a-tudat. 6 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [ § 230 (6) When the augment 51 is prefixed to a root commencing with s vowel, the result of the combination of the two vowels is the Vriddhi- vowel or Vriddhi-syllable (§ 10) of the radical vowel ; e. g. rt. ¥ ‘to go’; Impf. Par. SIL rb, SHE to sit’; Impf Atm. STH. rt SE ‘to see’; Impf. Atm. Bea. rf, S& ‘to sprinkle’; Impf. Par. ET. A rt. 3§ ‘to comprehend’; Impf. Atm. Yea. rt. RI ‘to go’; Twpf Par. HI. rb. TE ‘to grow’; Impt. Atm. THd. (¢) ‘When one or more prepositions are prefixed to a root, the augment takes its place after the prepostion or prepositions and immediately before the root ; e. g. rh. Fara Prep. 33; Pres. Ind. Par, geqgfa; Impf. Par, IgA ud-apatat i » @# and 37; Pres. Ind. Par. ggwafa; Impf. Par. qgTT samud-apatat. (d) When the letter g is prefixed to z; ‘to do,’ or to F ‘to scatter’ (§ 487, c) the augment takes its place immediately before the inserted qa; e 9. dF, Pres, Ind, Par. gesgi(y, Tupf. GHENT. § 230 (a) Reduplication consists in the doubling of the first vowel of a root together with any consonant that precedes it; e. g. rt. gE ‘to strike’; reduplicated FFL. rt. RFT ‘to be poor’; " TILE. (0) That portion of a reduplicated form which is prefixed to the root is called the reduplicative syllable; e. g. the first g in gga, or the first 7 in FRAT. (¢c) Prepositions prefixed to reduplicated verbal forms take their places before the reduplicative syllable; e. g. rt, qq with prep. &y and IY, Perf, Par. FEIT samut-papdta, (d) A reduplicated verbal form cannot be reduplicated again (see § 452.) § 231 (a) An aspirate letter of a root is in the reduplicative syllable represented by the corresponding unaspirate letter ; e. g. 323.) CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 81 rt. fT to split’; reduplicated fARDT. (§ 54.) vb. BTL to place i gH. rt. 951. ‘loenjoy”’ . » IY. (0) A guttural by the corresponding palatal ( guttural aspirate by palatal unaspirate ) ; & by a1; ¢. 9. rt. HH ‘to love; reduplicated HH. rt. TH “to go’, : SIH. rt, © ‘to dig’ HET, rt. ag “to eat’; + SHH. rt. E ‘to sacrifice”; 4 JE. (c) If a root commences with more consonants than one, only the first ( or the letter which according to (a) and (4) ought to be substituted for it ) is repeated in the reduplicative syllable; e. g. rt. & ‘to hear’; reduplicated IH. rt. FT “to shine’; ” TANS rt. FH to-go’; » TH. (d) But if a root commences with a sibilant which is followed im- mediately bya surd consonant, this surd consonant or its representative must be repeated in the reduplicative syllable ; (the letter g prefixed to the roots g; and a (§ 487 0) is treated as part of the root); e. g. € rt. EF ‘ to support’; reduplicated JE. rt. ®T ‘to stand’; JET. rt. THT ‘to leap’; ” TERE Rt. z with prep. FH=HEF ; Perf Par. gmzsix. (¢) The reduplicative syllable must contain one of the three (short) vowels 3, g, or §; of these, (short) sy represents radical a, wy1, =, x, andgg; (short) g radical g, g, uw, and @; and ( short ) g radical 3, =, fy, and sy; €. ¢. rt. TH‘ to shine’; reduplicated THIS. , ~ vb Gv viedo’; 4 a5. rh. TY ‘tobefit; ET. J 11s 32 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, Co [§282— th for ‘to split’; rednplicatel ~~ farfesa. th tebuyi. faa. rt. qq ‘to tremble’; |, fora. rh 8. "fo oub; ’ [ rt. gig ‘to approach’; TEE. § 232. Roots commencing with g, followed by a vowel or a dental letter, and the roots fx, Tag, and fag generally change their inital @ to gq (¥q to g, ¥Y to 9 and H to cog) after any vowel of the reduplicative syllable except 27 or 31. But this Shonge does not take place in roots containing the vowel zz or . L. g. rt. {&, Redupl. Perf. fae; vb. fem, faftady; ot fF, fads; rt fea, Red; og, gas rt. gq, Foaiq; rt. &g, ger; 1b fag, fering; rt, ®, gona. —But vt. €F, JERE; vt, GET; rh TE, GER de SPECIAL AND (GENERAL TENSES. § 233. The Present tense in its three moods (Indicative, Potential, and Imperative) and the Imperfect are called Special Tenses; the remaining tenses and the Benedictive are called General Tenses. This distinctionis founded on the circumstance that in the Present and Imperfect the characteristic marks of the tenses and moods and the per- sonal terminations are mostly added to a special base, derived from the root in various ways, while in the remaining tenses and moods those marks and terminations are combined with the root itself, A,—SPECIAL TENSES. Present (Indicative, Potential, Imperative) and Imperfect. § 234. The special base of the special tenses is formed in nine different ways. Accordingly all primitive roots have by the native grammarians been divided into nine classes, each class being denomi- nated after the root which stands first in it. § 235. Formation of the Special Base in the nine classes :— 1. Special base of roots of the first class (¥eqrfyr i. e. commencing with 3’): (a) wx is added to the root ; (0) The vowel of the root is gunated ( § 10 ), except when itis proso- dially long ( § 8) and not final ; ; (observe § $48Y:e. 4. § 235] CONJUGATION OTF VERDS. 83 “to know’; special base 4. wh ‘tobe’ , on WI +W=WE (§49.) tio lead); .: 1 , 9 +u=-a. “to call’; » ” 8 +A =. ‘to sing’, Ji BY oer SY en WI, 2 ‘tospesk’ gE, But fez ‘fo blame’; a foes. : HH “ to sing’; . - FT, qn tio faint: ol TB. 2. Special base of roots of the second class (rz7fT 4. e. ‘ commencing with ay’ ): the root remains unchanged ; i. e. = ons § Pov mu a HF ‘to eat’; special base HAF. re is miko » GE ar ‘to go’; : » » ar. 3. Special base of roots of the third class (ggi@F i. e. ‘ commencing with gEify oe. Zz ): the root is reduplicated according to §§ 230 and 231; but radical 3 and = are in the reduplicative syllable represented by g, not by s; e. g. g ‘tosacrifice’; special base JJ. ” cal. J 40 bear: - fag. 4. Special base of roots of the fourth class ( fagify i. e. ‘commencing with fg’): or is added to the root ( observe §§ 46 & 48); e. g. al ‘to give’; a gg, ‘fo bind’; special base a. ga ‘tobe pleased’;,, » TH. Ra Stoplay’s Dye Agere, Ae 3 ‘togrowold’; ,, : AH. 5. Special base of roots of the fifth class (wig i.e. * commencing with gq ): q ( changeable to up by § 58) is added to the root; e .g. 84 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ §236— 8 ‘to squeeze qui’; special hase PT. HY “to obtain’; 5 » HY. YH to dare’; 5 » SIL 6. ¥podal base of roots of the sixth class (gifs i. e. ‘commencing with qT ’) % is added to the root ; (before this + ¥, final g and g become 2 EY, final Sn ¥ become gq, nl sg becomes Re, and final =z becomes gv; §§ 45, 47, 48); e. g. ke strike ’; special base dT. BR ogo wm Hou. 8g ‘to praise % 2 3 gd. aq $ to die i » I» fag. F to scatter; % il FE 7. Special base of roots of the seventh class (gqrfy ¢. e. ‘ commencing with gg’ ): a nasal homogeneous with the final consonant of the root ( Anusvara before sibilants and g)i is inserted between the radical vowel and the final consonant, except in roots which already have a nasal for their penultimate letter; e. g. ®Y ‘to obstruct’; special base TH. _ 1 ™ gS “to join’; ehiis Ch gS. fay “to pound’; i i fa. But Seg to moisten 3 x SE. 8. Special base of roots of the eighth class (ale? i. e. ‘commencing with a9 ): § is added to the root; e. g. dq ‘to stretch’; special base THF 9. Special base of roots of the ninth class { FqT{% 4. e. ‘ commencing with st’ ): #t ( changeable to off by § 58 ) is added to the root ; before it a penultimate radical nasal is dropped ; e. g. Z . flojoin; special base gl. to buy ) Lc Spydiy. FHA‘ to support’; » . Hl § 236. Seine roots form their special base in two or more ways ;e. g. g ‘to join’ belongs both to the second {pies and to the ninth (kryddi) class; Spec. base g and gt. wa ‘to go’ belongs to the first ( bhvddi ) and to the fourth (divddz) class; Spec. base sry and srg ( both irre- § 241. ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 85 gular). To which class or classes a root belongs, must be ascertained from the practice of the best writers or from the dictionary. § 237. Unchangeable special base and changeable special base. The special base of roots of the first (bhudds), fourth (divdds), and sixth (tudddi) classes (i. e. of those classes in which the special base ends in 37) remains, with some slight modifications, unchanged throughout all the forms of the special tenses and moods in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The special base of the roots of the remaining six classes has generally two forms, a strong base and a weak base. Accordingly the conjugation of roots of the first, fourth, and sixth classes differs in the special tenses from that of roots of the sccond (adddz), third (juhotyddi), fifth (svddi), seventh (rudhddi), eighth (tandds), and ninth (Aryddi) classes. (a.)—Special Tenses of Roots with Unchangeable Special Base. ( 1st, 4th, and 6th classes, ) 1.—PresENT INDICATIVE. § 238. The personal terminations given in col. I. of § 227 are added - to the special base; e. g. rt. Y 1el spec. B. MT; Pres. Ind. Par. waf; Atm. Had Bate wi Binns al des rt. az 6 el » ” ds; » ”» » gala; ”» gga. § 239. (a) Before terminations beginning with 7 or 7 the final 37 of the special base is lengthened ; e. g. 1 Sing. Par. sy1fiy. (b) The final 31 of the special base combines with initial (short) ay of a termination to (short) 3, and with (long) 27 or T tog; e. g. 3 Plur. Par. yygfea; 1 Sing. Atm. 373; 2 Du. Atm, 333. . 3. —PRrESENT POTENTIAL. § 240. gz (changeable to gar before vowel-terminations) is added to the special base, and to the base so modified the personal terminations given in col. IL of § 227 are-added ; e. 4. rt. J 1cl.sp. B. yg; Pot. P. uy +34+a=v99; A aT +r+a=vaa. hofgg del, Few, EEAHEHASAE;, SETHIHA=SEA. gg bck, 3m noo gE HETHAEEEA; » GT HEHAEEEE § 241. 3: is substituted for the termination Aq of the 3 Plur. Par., # for g of the 1 Sing. Atm,, and {9 for s37q of the 3 Plur. Atm, e, g. 86 ©. SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. - : [§242— 3 Plur. Par. WIFI = 1 Sing. Atm. FIFTH =37. 3 Plur. Atm. WAHT +TA=WAT. 3.—PRESENT IMPERATIVE, § 242. The personal terminations given in col. IV, of § 227 are add- ed to the special base; e. g. vt. J 1cl spec. B. Wa; Imperat, Par. AIF; Atm, WIT. gad . , Tw, . GEG, EEE, YEE Bieta eG ag) 10 Amr, § 243. (a) The termination fi of the 2 Sing. Pai. is dropped; e. 7. 2 Sing, Par. wa. (b) The final 37 of the special base combines with initial (short) sf of a termination to (short) a1, and with the initial a7 of the terminations stra, and rere to w; e.g. 3 Plur, Par. wygeg; 2 Du. Atm. TAT; 3 Du: Atm. : (¢) qr, way optionally be substituted for the terminations fi and g of the 2 and 3 Sing. Par, when these two forms have: a benedictive sense; ¢. ¢. WAFIg ‘may you be!” ‘may be be! 4. —IMPERFECT. § 244. The special base receives the augment (§ 229), and the rad terminations given in col. IL, of § 227 are added to it;e. g. rt. 3 1cl spec. B. WH; Impf. Par. THF; Atm, WF. ri. faq 4 oy, 7 ” CAEVH ” 2 HLA; : ” HE. ATG, TE i. 0 TETAS on SIOER § 245. (a) Before terminations beginning with Ff or 7 the final 3 of the special baseislengthened ; e.g. 1 Du. Par. spare; Atm. AWATHE. (0) The final 1 of the erty base combines with initial (short) af of a termination to (short) 31, and with (long) sw to ge. 4. 1 Sing. Par. Fae; 2 Du Atm, ATH. Paradigms. §- 246. The Sede) Tenses of a cl. 1 ‘to be’ fz cl. 4 (commonly ak P.) ‘to play; gg cl. 6 ‘to strike.’ Root: iq faa gz. Spee. Base: Wd ¥3a G8 § 246.) . "nN Parasmai. Atmane. sl Lari ux Sing. i 15 5 g wafd waa fe 1.9919: WE, EE 3. WIT: Wad 2.0TT WALT 1. WAT: WHE 5 B - 8. wafea wae LWAT] ¥aT H 3. WAY WA ayy waa CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 1. — Present Indicative. 2 a Parasmeai. Atmane. fsa {5a fisata {sad fafa dean Seat: {1samag eq: say saa: fsa gear: saHE fay AeA fsatea dea 9.— Present Potential. feuay HAA fz: sau 2. afd Way TA: WAAL: 87 . A Parasmai. Atmane. EUG gfe gaa gafa gaa SEACH ACE gaa: gad gad: gaa ga: gag gad gE gzfea ga=a FT, gia ge: gad ged gaa gi gal 3 2. MARY WAIT S5AqT AAT GIA GAT, 3. MAAN] WAATANG S5aarg. SEAT, GIA gearar. Lua WANE few dean 2. WA WAH dad glean 3. WEY: WATT |e WF TE oh a 2 or HIATT warty wa or FIAT 3.— Present Imperative. Femifar sa or EAA, 3, M9g WAM fag {159A gw geafE ged ged iY: GEE gait ge de deed or Jal did g3q or gedreg 88 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§247— Parasmai. Atmane. Parasmai. Atmane. Parasmai, Atmane, Lag waEg femd deaEs gee gee : 2.9999, WIA, {EAA AAU, GIT gan 3. MAAN Wad] 54a EAA. gar gaan LAW awe fA saEE ge gem 2.997 Wad {1599 4legeAq gad gaean 3.9q7g WFQ greasg FeaFa g3ed Fem 4.— Imperfect. Lowag, wa adierq wdisa ogee way 2.90: WWAYL: SAGA: ALAA UF: AFIT: 3.ANTq, AVAT ALISA WESAT AEA, AFA 1.9WaE waa wEisam sdsaat saga vgaat 1 a SANIT, ANAT] AL STH AAAI] AGFA AGIA] 3. STATA AAA ALISA AS SAANT AGZATT AFIATL Je FAH TAA dear sdsam iE agg sgawiE z 2.HNIT ATTY ALGAE [FAH Aged ATA | ANIA, ANAT AEST ALETq AGF ogaea Irregular roots of the 1st, 4th and Gth classes. § 247. Al roots of the 1st, 4th, and Gth classes form their special tenses from their special bases exactly like 33, faq, and gg, but some are irregular as fav as the formation of their special base is concerned. Of these the more common are: — First Class ( Bhvdds). S 248. (a) IT P. A. “to hide,’ 5g P. (with prep. =r) ‘ to sip,’ and fgg P. “to spit’ lengthen their vowel ; e. g. rt. 77g, Spec. B. 71x, Pres. Ind. Par. ef. —FH, ‘to go’ does the same in Par.; Par. srafy, Atm, FHT —7T FP. ‘to wipe’ (also cl. 2) substitutes Vr iddhi for its vowel, and gg P. ‘to sit’ (also cl. 6) changes it to ; Fret, and diz. (= and fog also follow cl. 4; HAT below, and grxfa). (0) gx P. ‘to bite,’ TW P. A. ‘to colour,’ SE P. ‘to adhere,’ and ~ § 250.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS, 89 as A. ‘to embrace’ drop their nasal; e.g. rt. gr, Spec. B. gm, Pres. Ind. Par. gard; (3 also follows cl. 4) (c) mw, P. A. “to go,’ and aw, P. ‘to restrain’ change their final to go 0: rt. 773g, Spec. B. ar=g ( § 54), Pres. Ind. Par. sregfa.—=x P- ‘to go’ forms gz, Pres. Ind. x=afy. (d) «qr P. ‘to blow’ and zr P. ‘to record’ form gi and #«; Pres. Ind. quia, Af. ! (¢) mr P. “to smell,’ qr P. ‘to drink, and mp P. A. ‘to stand’ form fary, fs, and fs; Pres. Ind. Par. 4 fafa, fefy.—The spec. base for = be ‘to see’ is gga; Pres. Ind. Par qzafy. (f°) FP. ‘to give,’ § FP. ‘to run, and Frg P. ‘to fall,” form wg, ara, and zit Atm. respectively; e. 9. g 3. fafig: farfafeR aq: TAT 118 9. Rt. fer, Perf. B. fafa, Par. (1. fafaee Sing. Dual er Mor ap ) 3 4 Plur DO al — A A 6. Bt HES. Perf, B. ATS, Par. (1. stress lo. stair “or strae (3. STAT (1. AS = |or STTAST A | 2. maT: 3. ATA: SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 314— 4. Rt. 7 5. Rt. oH, S. B. IH or Ih, Perf. B. STH, W. B. 9%H. TT ee. Par. Atm, Par. Atm. THTH TH AE ATH or HHA IETS AEMY Ara Any THT TRH CIES] ATE IEF SHAE AMET AEA AEAL: THAH ATEY: SHY TFA: AFA SEI: STE IHEAA TRNAS ATH SITEHE THA THEA AE" arta THA: TAT ATG: AMET 7. Bt. ¥9, 8 BuRY, 9. Bs SW, S.B.ZAT.S. B.AME, S.B. Forfa, W.B.§9. W.B.srqE W. B. fue. Par. Par. Par. Atm. AY SAH far faa or fq ANY wafay fel FE or fay EOL IS Cu fram fae Hyg oafag fafFaa ffFaER fy: argEy: faery: fea fq: wrgEq: fea: feed § 314.] = =] ee ey Plur. Sing. Dual. CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 119 1. srafw fm rata fafaw fafa [ ASH A amg 9 wrga fea fafador ~ - A - & 2 trata ade Conjugated like { . 3. far : Trfrar the Atwauc. 156 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 402— Parasmai. Atmane. Passive, 1. Fiprara: ArfrarEs z 2. ATES: EINER] 3. drfrariy Stara 1. afrared: AATERE, 2 (2. aifraren arfarara 3. FATT: afar: Conditional. 1. SAFICT “1 should SAATCISA ‘Tshould SAAT “1 should on i know.’ : know.’ be known.’ = iy on 7 43 FATES: SAAHCAAT: Conjugated like o9 Te aq AAEregq the Atmane. t. SAFISATT Ars = Sa “eS Z (2. FAFSA] AFA ~ > NNN 3. ASIA AFTISIATH 1. SAFISATH ATTA = (2. sreifrsaa STE By | . ~ (3. AAMTSIT A(T Benedictive. (1 geargy, Mal ayfydfig Marl Sifirefra ay Die o; iS know ! skin, know! known! 2 2. FeqT: SAMENIETe Conjugated like 3. FETT AINE the Atmane. % Feared Ardtaf 2 3 FATE FIrTrATETg i ] (3. FEAT, TieraTET . Me ip HL MY : EATER TITHE z L TATE Aifireteag. a - . NEN 2. Tea: TET § 403. Alphabetical List of some Irregular Verbs with their principal Tenses in Parasmai., Atmane., and Passive, Root. Voice. Present, Perfect. Aorist. Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Benedictive. 1 ots{# cl 1D. Pur 9AfR fAa® or fara w@ANAIVor afr Farr dam ‘to go, to throw.’ feat or fra srs Vv. aitwsafa eifywar or SATS frat faleaa fsa: fazag: fafean Eco =7: Pass. Faq {45% 3. Sg. AANA ASAT or AQT or ag or 1. Sq. sre firor Area dor ATAATor ARAL or Aff or asqa atfyar ATE JIA * In the general tenses df must be substituted for 35 before terminations beginning with a vowel or with J, and it may optionally be substituted before terminations beginning with any consonant except I, Leov § JO NOILLVDALNOD SITTA 61 Root. Voice. Present. Perfect. Aorist. © Simple Fut, Periph. Fut. Benedictive. 2. Ug*cl.2P. Por. wif 1.Sg. Wg or sad IL eta TT HIATT ‘to eat.’ (§ 267) TH or TI" , STFA (§ 306) or Say HAF or TT" Du. ATT or STAT (§ 316) &e. 3. Sg. IIfy = ro co Pass. 37d aha TE 1 “wis O95 TT TeHIY 3. T with prep. Atm. Sf afer EAL or SEAT FEAAT ALAN afat a.2A (§270) ay Cond. STSISIT ‘to read, to or TEAST study.’ Pass. Sad 3. 5g. ITEATRT or STE * 99 is substituted for 3F in the Aor., and optionally in the Perf. _T TT is substituted for ¥ itor AM in he Perf., and optionally in the Aor. and Cond. When this substitution takes place, the Aor. A, and the Cond. are formed irregularly, as shown above. 8¢1 UVNAVEY LIGMSNVS gov § | 3. wa" cl.2 Par. TOT FOI or TOATT SANOTTEHIA, or | Fofaeafiror Forfaaror FAT, NE \ P. A. ‘to cover) or TAMA SOLA or FAGAN or V. IAAmARY FoAArT 2G (§272) oj. a 300,0) St SUCHE] Atm. TUX IU a AEE or | FEE: FoifrEror FTL or swe | sofa softwar setae Pass. & Sd TOI 3. Se, AYOTT TOTS or FotaTor SOT or 1.8 Aor Forfar Ff: qlor of ig or or sirgfafin TOANTSAT SONUTAAT FONE or STOTT 5. Ft cL 1A. Atm. HAA BIAATAE &e. or AMFAT or FARIS or HIACAAT or HIATT Lor ‘to love. (§248,9) TEN FqaFAT IIL. Ffasgy sfyar wHEN” Pass. FEA or =Atm. 3. Sg. THT =Atm. =Atm. =Atm, FETA 1. Sg. SHTATATY or or or or STRTIHTY FHS HIHAT FANG or STRAT * In Aor. Par. the final vowel is changed to Vriddhi or Guna. Before terminations with intermediate ¥, the Guna which by other rules should be substituted, is optional. Notice the reduplication in the Perf. + FF and IT (No. 7) may form the general tenses from their special bases. [20% § 'SHYTA IO NOILVDALNOD 6ST Root. Voice. Present. Perfect. Aorist. Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Benedictive. 6. FI (opt.-amif) Atm FAS TEA HAFRITV, or FRIOTI or 1. Sg. HFRAATE FRAN or 21 An FTF fTor TH AFALV, or FEET or oFFAR FEIT tionally P. in Par. SHIA 11. ETSI) Or FHEATIER Aor, the two Fut. & Cond.) ‘to be fit. 7. YT (opt.-anif) Par. TATARY MATATAHIL Lo. AMAEAA V., Tqrirsafior TIOIAT or IHATZAT or el, TP. “to (§248,9) or Ja or SGV, qifysafy or UAT or gravy guard.” (Com- 28 FAT or or AMET IV. ICRA TAT ~ pare 5. A) FTC as, ha N Phe) —~ ~ > nn -~ 2a on Sn oo Pass. TET MGAEH &e. 3. So. SNA TWIHASAT or IFAT or MATAHE or or JIA or FIA or STI WRIST or ANCYAT or USE or 1. Sg. FANAEALT Are@S TAT qed or STATA or spgfed 8.8 (opt-anit) Par. YEA JIT WIE V, or ESAT or EAT or TAT, cL.1P.A. “to ($248) JURA or FE ATA VIL ArgAlq MET hide. SUG IIE or JIF &e. * Tustead of substituting Guna, IT lengthens its vowel, when the final is followed by a vowel. 091 AVININVITO LIYMSNVS —20F § 1 9. SAT* cl. 2P. Par. SWI ‘to wake. P. ‘to be poor.’ 11. Fb cl 4 A. Atm. a9 “to perish.’ 12.97 cl. 1 A. Atm, Mas Ea 322, a). (optionally P. Par. in Aor.) ‘to shine.’ * SI substitutes Guna for its final vowel in the general tenses, except where it may or must take Vriddhi inthe Perf.and in the Aor. Pass. Pass. T&T aS IIR FET V., or FIR or FIA ko. ATF | VIL = Atm. SATIRIC &e. or (§265,3). STSAIIT (§ 300, c). 1 Du SSIUITES 10. RFT cl. 2 Par. FRCFIA FNEIEHT &e. or (§ 274). FREY (§ 500, 0). EEE] or TE | (§ 365). 3 Sg. SLE; the rest = Atm. HATTA V. 3 Sg, Pass. = ASEM AFFTHA VI. or AFF V. IME IV. FAIA V. or SHITAT I. T gftgr drops its final in the general tenses; optionally in Aor.; not in Perf. I 4, 16 fir, and 17:9 change their final vowel to sy, wherever Guna or Vriddhi ought to be substituted for it, and they are then treated like roots ending in gy; 20 Fh does the same optionally. gt is irregular in Perf. = Atm. SCSI fa Frgsara TrEAr or maT = Atm. Saar givigar EAL SN, NAar SAAT, Tiara FIA Aras SUTUA 10 NOLLVHALNOD [coy § 191 Root. Voice. Present. Perfect. Aorist. Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Benedictive. 13. 9" (opt.- Par. AFAR AFH or FATA Aamq Il. Atrsafqor Ad@ror AAA angt) cl. 4 P. AY or ATTA asgafq Aw ‘to perish.’ GGIE ARTF or 7 &e. 14.9] cl. 6 Par. WR TAF or TAS TAA | TE TEA or WY or FATT P. A. ‘to fry. (§ 2505). Fafa) Ie osetia, | weAfy we (§ 381, b, 6). or TG | |or FS . TH or FAN FURAT orga &e. Atm. ISI AFH or FAS Yor y FEI or Wor TEE or aug | wed wor wefiy Pass. ISAT =Atm, 3 Sg. wf =Atm., =A tm. =Atm. (§ 387,b). or STAI; the rest = Atm. 15. AM cl. 6 Par. AWM AAS AAAI. Aggafa ag ASAT, P. ‘to dive. ARAL or ARGFA HAAS &e. * In forms that require Guna or Vriddhi, T3C and HAST insert a nasal, w nen the root is immediately followed by a consonant. + = may substitute «st, except where Tis contracted to =. Il UVINVIY IITASNVS —eop § J 16. Brel. 5 Par. P. A. ‘to throw.’ (Compare 1 gi.) Atm. frga fae Pass. Ha T w= 17. #cL.9P.A. Par. ‘to destroy.” Atm. Hisar J (Compare n zT.) 18. cl. 6 A. (but P. in Perf, the two Fut. and Cond.) “to die.’ HIATT i rest like fir. faq AAT or WE THT (§ 314). HATE VL HATE IV. 3 Sg. SATA 1 Sg. HAT or SATAY HIF LV. AIS quar HEE qed HEAT ATE HIE or HIT or ATH or aitrsaq HIATT AANE afreafy 1.9g. AQIRT TNE [gop § ‘STYIA J0 NOILVOALNOD 91 Root. Voice. Present. Perfect. Aorist. Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Benedictive. 19.99 (opt.- Par. WIE HATH AAA Voor AUASATT ANSQT FAT, anit Jel. 2 P. (§ 276). HAUNT or HATS AAA IV. or ATEATT or ATE ‘to wipe. TAT HEAT or AHITAT or HHT ATTY: or AATHY: AIS: or AAA: qatAw or wT or HGSH HTT or HATH HTT]: or AAT: Pass. gAq WHS or WHATS 3 Sg. WAIST WiSTSAQ Awan AST 1 Sa. HATS or AEA or ATET or PEA, or FFE * 731 everywhere substitutes Vriddhi instead of Guna; Vriddhi is optionally substituted also in weak forms before a vowel. TOL AVINIVTD LITMSNYS 20.37cl. 9 P. Par. “to attain; cl. 4 A. ‘toad- here. (Compare 11 0). {ofa (§ 204). Atm. IY Pass. Fad ry ASNAIV. or SIRT or FaEg VI. IE oY AY IV. or ITA or = = HATE IV. Fra 3 Sg. ABTA FA or Se - 1 Sg. {IBY or IME or AFT or FATA AJAY ar or 2dr - dr or Tar - dr or FIAT or FAAr Nn ZYME or IEE Nin HIT or FTETY or STATE [eof § STYTA JO NOTLYHNLNOD SOL Root. Voice. Present. Perfect. Aorist. Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Benedictive. S 21.7 cl. 1A. Atm. qq FIN HATAT V., or ATASAA or ATT Tiare (optionally P. Par. ga IL ERIE] in Aor., Simple Fut. and Cond.) ‘to be. 22. 99 ‘to grow,’ conjugated like TT, ¢ 23. |g (opt Atm, WEA GET AHI V., or Wiegeador WfFgaror Agger = -~ a anig)cl. 1A. FRAN IRR AGA IV., or F@Ior FeAl FEY = (optionally P.in Par. TRI LL == 3 Aor., Simple Fut. (§370, b). Z and Cond) “o = flow, to drop.’ 24. TL cl.2.P. Par. BEd STHT or FAITH SELIG A gfsafy gear FEAT (with prep. (§ 283). SE or THY (§370, b). sometimes A.) AHH (§ 316). ‘to strike.’ HT &e. * &T substitutes a4 in the Benedictives, and in Aor. Par.; optionally in Aor. Atm, and Pass. The vowel of 99 is not lengthened in Aor, Par.; and the Aor, Atm., when formed of &%, is irregular, The 3 Sing. Aor. Pass. also is irregular, —eob §] Atm. gT IH aly Pass, qd WH srafafy V, givsaq gwar Trade or AERAIV. HAIG Tor STFYT: HAY or HET rrasary or AgEE &e. 3 Sg. AAT or EASA or EAT or ACIAZ or af gifs mifqar fade 1 Sg. STINT (§§ 398, 401). on or ATTY or FE [eo¥ § ‘SEYHA JO NOILLVONLNOD 91 168 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 404— II.—CONJUGATION OF DERIVATIVE VERBAL BASES. 1.—CONJUGATION OF THE ROOTS OF THE TENTH CLASS AND OF THE CAUSAL OF ALL ROOTS. A.—The Roots of the Tenth Class. § 404. The conjugation of the roots contained in the tenth class ( denominated gufe, i.e. ‘ commencing with gg’) of the native gram- marians differs from that of the primitive roots collected.in the first nine classes in this, that the personal terminations and the characteristic marks of the various tenses and moods are not added immediately to the root, but to a derivative base, previously derived from the root. This derivative base appears not merely in the special tenses, but remains, with few exceptions, throughout the whole conjugation. Z. g. rt. “to steal’ Derivative base =if¥; Pres. Ind. Par. Qgafa choray-ati; Perf. Qgatasx choray-dichakdira,; Simple Fut. Syefaeafa choray- ishyati; Periph. Fut. Sgfaqr choray-itd ; Bened. Par, [Eg chor-ydt; Bened. Atm, Syxfrdie choray-ishishta; Pass. Pres. Ind. dy chor- yate, &c. (a) Formation of the Derivative Base. § 405. 1. The vowel g is added to the root; ec. g. rt. fyeg, Deriv. Base furfeq; rt. dig, dif; rt. 1, wif. 2. The root undergoes the following changes: — (¢) Guna is substituted for a penultimate (prosodially) short vowel; e.g. rt. faq, Fifa; rt. gT, ING rte gL, qi. (6) Vriddhi is substituted for a final vowel; e.g. rt. fg, Sif; vt. =f, qf; rte g, arf vb, arf ota, ani et 9 qIfY. (¢) A penultimate (prosodially short) s1 is lengthened; e.g. rt. uf, FTfoT; rt. |, AL (2) Penultimate 5 is changed to 2T; e.g. rt F4, Fld. § 406, The following are the common roots in which the radical vowel (against § 405, 2, a, ¢) remains unchanged : rt. gar (Deriv. Base afi), ga, Tg; ®y (Deriv. Base Hf), vr, aq, A, TL, T&, TQ, qT, TY, WT.— Rt. Hg forms optionally Fi or Fifw. § 407. Some roots may optionally add z1r{g to the root, instead of I; e.g. vt. A, AY or ify; vt. ayoy, awfor or qunfy. § 414.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 169 (0) Conjugation of the Derivative Buse. § 408. Roots of the 10th (churddi) class ave like roots of the first nine classes conjugated in three voices, the Parasmaipada, the Atmanepada, and the Passive voice, and the remarks in §§ 224 and 225 apply to them as they apply to primitive roots. 1.—THE PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA. A.—TuE PreseNt ( INDIC., PorENT., IMPERAT, ) AND IMPERFECT. § 409. The Derivative Base is conjugated like a primitive root in of the 1st (bvddi) class, the final g of the deriv. base being treated like a final g of such a root; e.g. rt. gg, Deriv. Base |i; Special Base Sia; Pres. Ind, Par. Sgafay, Atm. Sigg; Pres. Pot. Par. gd, Atm. He- Ia; Pres. Imper. Par. Fag or FIAT, Atm, HeFar; Imperf. Par. siigaa, Atm. saa. B.—THE Perirarastic Perrecr, THE Two Futures, tHE CoNDI- TIONAL, AND THE BENEDICTIVE. § 410. Roots of the 10th (‘churddi) class form the Perfect from their derivative base by means of the auxiliary verbs &, 31a, or iq, according to the rules given in §§ 328 and 329. I rt, gg, Deriv. Base =i; Polphrande Perf. Par. TAH, or FATHE, or RATT; Atm. SITE, or IIAE, or ATT. § 411. In the two Futures the terminations given in § 368,06, and § 373, b, are added to the derivative base with the intermediate g, before which the final g of the derivative base is gunated; e.g. rt. gg, Deriv. Base Sift, Simple Fut. Par. sigfieafy, Atm. Sgfiega; Periphr, Fut. 1 Sing. Par. Sgr, Atm. TATE. § 412. The Conditional is derived from the Simple Future accord- ing to the rule given in § 378; e.g. Condit. Par. srawfred, Atm, AFA. § 413. In the Benedictive Par. the Parasmai. terminations given in § 380, ¢, are added to the derivat. base, the final g of which is dropped ; e.g. rt. FT, Deriv. Base ry, Bened. Par. sgig. In Atmane. the Atmane. terminations given in § 380, ¢, are added to the derivat. base with the intermediate T, before Sui the final g of the derivative base is gunated; e.g, Bened. Atm. FTE. C.—THE AORIST. § 414. Roots of the 10th (ciurddi) class always take the third or reduplicated form of the Aorist. The derivative base is reduplicated 22 170 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [$s 415 and the augment is prefixed to the reduplicated form. The terminations are the same as those of the third form of the Radical Aorist of primitive roots (§ 341,08), and before them the final g of the derivative base is dropped. Z.g. rt. f=, Deriv. Base {yfeq; with redupl. and augment stata; with termination of the 1 Sing. Par. afafafratag=-fa- 57 aq; Atm. sfatE=g. Rt. g, 3 Sing. Par. AGFAT; It FY, ATFIA. Note: Tn the following rules it will be convenient to call the derivative base, after its final zg has been Jrenped, the base-syllable; e.g. A will be called the base-syllable of {mfee, = the hase-syllable of rf (Deriv, Base of rt. FI). § 415. The vowel of the base-syllable of a base which begins with a consonant undergoes in the reduplicated Aorist the following changes : — (@) A penultimate ary is shor pened; penultimate g, T, and gare reduc- ed to g, penultimate 3, =r and fy to 3; e.g. rt. {3q; Deriv. B. gifa; Aor. Par. AAT. hoi Lie sof» Ate: udivas, i EG > Par Afiged. rt. =e; 9) » ata; ’ Atm, sad. i 1 a Par. sigyza. xt. IT HE » = 2 HqYIE: (b) The penultimate vowel of the base-syllable of yg and certain other roots may optionally follow (a), or remain unchanged; e.g. vt. rg; Deriv. B. dif; Aor. Par. srfifyeq or fades. 9 The penultimate vowel of the base-syllable of q, =, NE, BIT and certain other roots must (against ¢) remain unchanged; e.g. vt. gg; Deriv. B. ga; Aor. Par. AGFA. nb. QT; 25 3 wi; 3 PD AfARAT. EE; eo» BAG» AGIA (d) Penultimate sg, 11, 3T (and wg ) of the base-syllable, being substitutes for original =, 5, (and i), remain either unchanged, or AT, ATL, and gg are reduced to (short) sx (and sg to z); e.g rt. go; Deriv. B. qfyy; Aor. Par. stqusiq or srfigars. rt, FR 33 1 HA; ys 3 sfuIaE or AFIT. § 416. When the rules given in the preceding paragraph have been applied to the base-syllable, the following rules must be applied to the vowel of the reduplicative syllable:— § 417] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 171 (z) The vowels g and § of the reduplicative syllable ave lengthened, when the base-syllable is prosodially short and commences with only one consonant; e. g. rt. gL; Deriv. B. J11Y ; reduplicated ga; by § 415 (a) changed to gg; becomes IIL; Aor, Par, ATI rt. fxg; Deriv. B. fF, reduplicated {Rygfa; changed to ff; becomes =fi{xrq ; Aor. Atm. s=fifaas. But rt. gx; Deriv.B. gay; Red. gagfay; remains a rt. =|; 3 ww; » CSIR ” a=; 3 an AfA|ad. vt. IF, » » GIL; » T9FITE; when remaining fidre, stfrqrea. arin . » changed to {gfgg, AFITYST. (b) The vowel gr of the reduplicative syllable is changed to g, when the base-syllable is prosodially short and begins with only one consonant ; and to g, when the base-syllable is prosodially short and begins with more consonants than one; e.g. Rt. Deriv. B. © Red. changed to becomes Aor. Aq; Aw; dA AAR; dee; Atm sdfwea. bE qe QUI; 99%; qigr; Par wfigea. ft; qi; Sst; AST; faa; afd. 7; qi; qafi; qo; WIL; oH» Agua; but when it remains gqqef, the base-syllable is prosodially long, and the a7 of the reduplicated syllable remains unchanged; Aor. Par. srqqatq. Rt. ger; Aor. Par. srgzgg &c. (c) The vowel = of the reduplicative syllable of sey, WE, @T, I. and certain other roots remains unchanged; that of arog remains If or is changed to g; e.g. rt. FY; Aor, Par. HAFFIT ; 16. AL, AqqY; rt. MAL, AFA, OF HST. § 417. Derivative bases commencing with vowels are reduplicated thus: (¢) When the initial vowel is followed by only one consonant, or by a conjunct the first part of which is neither a nasal nor one of the consonants gory, the consonant which immediately follows the initial vowel ( or the substitute of that consonant, see § 231), together with ¢ ¢ the vowel g, is inserted after the initial vowel; e.g. rt. gag, Deriv. Base gfe, without 3, wey; with reduplic. gfeg; with augment fee; Aor. Par. etfs. 172 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 418— (6) But when the initial vowel is followed by a conjunct the first part of which is a nasal or gory , the second consonant of the con- junct or its substitute, together nih the vowel g, is inserted after the first consonant of the conjunct ; e.g. rt. arsy; Deriv. Base =qf§r; without Tg, AA; with reduplic. Ata with augment srs; Aor. Par, wifes rt. AZ ( for gz ); Aor. Par. sifgzg ( for AFR )- (¢) The roots F9, Te} y AF, AF and certain other roots substitute 31 for the vowel g of the reduplicative syllable ; c.g. rt, +9, Aor. Par. Ara; rt. FY, ATRIA 3 rt. Eg AFF; rl Te, Aor, Atm. ardor. 2—THE PASSIVE. A.— Tue Present (INpic., Porent., IMPERAT.) AND IMPERFECT. § 418. The Present in its three moods and the Imperfect are formed from the derivative base in the same manner in which the Present and Imperfect of the Passive of a primitive root are formed from the root ; the final g of the derivative base, however, is dropped before the charac- teristic syllable a of the Passive. £.g. rt. JT, Deriv. Base [fy Pres, Ind. Pass. |yfa; Pres. Pot, aia; Pres. Imper. RERIEE Imperf. AE —rt. Petty, Base qiiy; Pres. Ind. Pass. greg ;—rt. 0, Deriv. Base fq; Pres. Ind. Pass. Faq. B.—Tue PrripHRASTIC PERFECT, THE AORIST, THE Two FUTURES, THE CONDITIONAL, AND THE BENEDICTIVE. (a).—The Perfect. § 419. The Perfect of the Passive is formed like the Perf. Atmane., except that all the three auxiliary verbs , stg, and SL be con- Jogeteds in the Atmane.;e.g. rt. g, Perf. Pass. FRFTIH, OF AIHA, or NIT. (0).—The Aorist. § 420. The 3rd Pers. Sing. (a) The 3 Pers. Sing. of the Aor, Pass. of roots of the 10th (churdds) class is formed by prefixing the augment to the derivative base ; e.g. rt. Tz, Deriv. B. Sif; 3 Sing. Aor. Pass. staf; rhe fig, dif; vt. ad, And; rh 9 qf; rh aq, HATHA. (6) The Rowe! e1 of WT and certain other roots which do not lengthen their 7 in the derivative base, may optionally be lengthened in the 3 Sing. Aor, Pass ; e.g. 317fE or qf. § 423.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 173 § 421. The remaining persons of the Aor. Pass. are formed optionally, either by augmenting the derivative base and by the addition to it of the Atmanepada terminations of the fifth form of the Aorist (§ 352, 0) before which the final of the deriv. base is gunated,—or by adding the same terminations, without their initial g, to the 3 Sing. of the Aor, Poss. 0g. rt. gg; Deriv. Base. Qf; | Sg. Aor. Pass. syavefafy; or siarfyfy. rt, 7g; 3 ” qe; $3 (3s 3) ’ Aiea; or sfifeiy. rt. 5 2 3 qi; 3 9 3 ss HAYA; or AQT. rt. {Es . 3 TT; yon 3 3 wey; or JET; or STE. (¢).—The two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive. § 422. The Atmanepada forms of these tenses are likewise used for the Passive. But the Passive may also be formed from the corre- sponding forms of the Atmane. by leaving out the syllable ug of the latter, and by changing the vowel of the derivative base as it is changed in the 3 Sing. of the Aor, Pass. ; e.g. rt. IT, Simple Fut. Pass. =efeay or atReqa; Periph, Fut. ,, =far or Siar Condit. yp SASESTT Or AATREAT; Bened. ARETE or Fife. rt, gg, Simple Fut. gReqq or feed or wide; Periph. Fut. ,, ggfhar or gEgaT or fda; Condit. sEtdasgg or JATRET Or AWTEEAT; Bened. , tEhrdig or qfgdiz or aide. Paradigm. § 423. Conjugation of rt. SEY cl. 10. P. A. ‘to steal,” in Parasmai., Atmane,, and Passive :— - ~N . Parasmal, Atmane. Passive, Present Indicative. ~ ~ > ay - nn 1. FTA TA Ei en ~~ 2 2. FEAR HAH TAY 3. FART TAS JAA Parasmai. . ACA: , TIL: 3. TIA: FITCATH: . IY o Sy [3.4 3. ATATeq Dual. —— BD - ed Plur. BO . SAT] - 1 2. FTA: 3. TAT 1 2 g J . Sa TIAT a a - Id - LAL , 4, d, co A Dual. rm sme Ee mmm ee O - 4, —-— y 1. STATI A bo ~N\T wo Ite El 2. IIH, , TFA, STAT . TIT De TTA Dual. L Nr BO = CO Plur. ee! 89 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. Atmane. - ~ ATWEE NL qTETAT TAS FATE TTA NTT Present Potential, Nos HIT NS EIERRIH Sa IIT nse qIIATE TCAATATH FICAATEAN, tN HITIHATE Sr HITT Bw, AIT Present Imperative. TNA ITF or FATT FA STE or AAT, FTAA, FRATER STILT Non AA > =) FTAA, TET TIA [§ 423 — Passive. a by HMEAEE Nr Eg Ses qd AAT Bn Sp SAAT: Sraa S&P rear SATA SAAT SAAT § 423.) Dual. Sing. Plur. Plur. Sing. Dual. rO 2 Lo 9 = Co 189) Co No Qo Parasmai. . ATI , SAAT: . ATI, . AATATT . AFEITY . ATI . AATITH . FATT . AIT, Parasmal. TATTHIT or ° FHI . ATIF . ATATTFT . ACATAFT . AATF: . FTATAEHT: . ATFTEH . TATE . FATA: CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 175 Atmane. Passive. Imperfect. HATCH Fd AACIAT: AFA HA LIAT HATA waaay AEEE qAAAY ADGA, ATTA AAA ANAWE ~~ AAA HATTA ATTA, FCAT FAI Periplrastic Perfect. Par, or Atm, ~ —r ™ FICATATH SrTAtawT FACATHIES BLUEICE IEE] TAAE TAT TeAmiET Satta TCE: AAAI: TAWIEY: AE GIG: Sama AAT . “og TEATHATE [TAT ATATATG: CATT: 176 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 423— Periplrastic Perfect ( continued ). Atm. or Pass. Passive. rs oN ba he . hat J! 1. STATE FTATATH FATA oY) = ~ > . = ~ 2 2. FrrataEy TATATEY SAFE mn NX . I. TATIH CATA FTA r ~ . ~ = oS ~ . lg | 1. ANIATFAE AAG AT, TATTLE To FuaiaEs Sears FAIS AS Leh A ls CATH AAA AAT 1. NAAFAZ ~~ FEAT rear £2 drAtEg SEAEtes SEE op ~~ . ~ CSS = » ~ 3, AAFATAERY AIMEE AEE Aorist. Parasmai. Atmane. Passive. 1 AIH AIT ATA or ATC 2p s 5 Sy ~ £12 AIG ATUL AACA TAR 3. AIF, ATIW HAT J 1 SL gk Z| 2 Ign San | 3. AYIA ATFEM 1. ATFUA ATFUAR 2. AFILA ATTA] 3. TIT ATI AACS AAT FATTO] ARTA] ATTA ARITA] FArfsafy ssa AMAA] STETq o 0 or gq or gH ALITA § 428] Parasmai. (1. |STfreaTly 2. Arfsafy 3. STfrsafa 1. SCSI: : EIR LPR 3. SEPreaa: | 1. Srefasara: 2. AST Ly Sasa Dual. Parasmai. 1. STTrranfe 2. Suara . Sar 1. SrfaarE: 2. LATE: 3. SrfaT 1 2 9 Dual. Plur. ——— OC ——, gr ——— ss . FATTCAATER: . Freres Soi 3. FITRATT Parasmai. . AFIT . AIST: NON - AUST, 23 8 td i CONJUGATION OF VERBS. Simple Future. Atm. or Pass. refs TTA TICRSI dN » ISTE TICRrsaY ERED Nal Sy TTISITHE, SrCrsaEy FITCATA Periphrastic Future. Atm. or Pass. oN ha AAT ShN SN IAA Conditional. Atm. or Pass. Ne Nr AFT JITIASTATS AFIAT Passive. sy SSI" SIs Saag sfeedrer EAT THAT, fsa rsa Passive. NO be) TIQTE SIA rar NA oo Fifaras Fifa ET JATCATERS “A = Fare TIRATT Passive. FTCA FA esTAT: HATTA 178 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 424— 1 eras srsarafy. sanaty 3 2. AMUAATAH ATAHAAN FAACAATH 3. AIHA, AMUASEA], A=SAAH L fas ANCASAE ASA — ~N Wy phy N\A Elz AATAET AACAIA] AAT] 3. AAUASAT ANAT FST Benedictive. Parasmai. Atm. or Pass. Passive. SQ NIN Nie pi SAE TERT SIT an he ¥ EN ~ nN" =! 9 Fra: refadigr: FICE: 2 SG SN EN es Ne oa 3. =A, fae Tifedig 1. TATE Nera mfdrafy X 2. FATEH SctadEEeny. Sidra | 3. TATE Stadia. stefan . =f; Ls srr 3 » ” ”» 8. |g “to wake;” mf; » SICA ‘he rouses.’ 9. fit ‘to conquer; wif; s» ATqATY ‘he causes to conquer. 10. gig ‘to be poor; FRE; » gRgafa < he makes poor. 11. gx ‘to sin;’ Fw; ” EREIR] ‘he causes to sin; in the sense of ‘to make depraved’ it forms optionally gM or MY (zuafa or Fre). 7. fa cl. b.‘to gather;’ : ‘he causes to gather.’ [ 3a) 182 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. Root. Caus. Base. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus. 12. + ‘to shake yf; Par. gagfy ‘he causes to shake.’ 13. qr ‘to protect; gifs; , gr@xfd ‘he protects.’ 14. off ‘to delight; =fifor; , Mogg ‘he causes to delight.’ Jif; Cn aga ‘he frightens with.’ - os i 3 . . 5 15. aff ‘to fear; Bi Atm. qrggg Lie Heh ey! fife; fw J 16, yam ‘tofry; Jo Par, z = iq Jove causes to fry.’ > 5 HEY Ag1d 17. 7s ‘to wipe” H{WS; » AAR ‘he causes to wipe.’ 18. TH ‘to colour; Ry; , wegAM ‘he colours; but in the sense of ‘to hunt deer’ it forms fst, Tafa. Root. Caus. Base. 3 Sing Pres. Ind. Caus. 19. gg ‘toperish;y gig; Par. eax ‘he subdues.’ 20. zytito desire; Rw; , TER ¢ he makes desirous.’ 2. @itoge) ke; XW; 4 oul ‘he causes to go.’ » i 3 mf) 29. ‘to grow ; $ UR orn gaa ‘he causes to grow.’ We dy a Gis % 23. yg ‘toobtain;y GR; ,, wEaAfad ‘he causes to obtain.’ sifyor,, TEAM eT ~ | used in various senses, for 24. Fx ‘to attain’ Si eh which see the Diction- IIyor ,, JAA ary. wife; » oad 95 ‘ » Fifq; AAAS ‘he causes to blow,” &c. 25.1190 Ho blow { ai; 5, AAR ‘he shakes.’ 26. Jr ‘to conceive;’ ! anf Ee Lt t ‘he causes to conceive; UY; 5» AGAR in other senses it forms regularly only arf, Fraafy. Root. Caus. Base. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus. 27, =d&Y ‘to select; fy; Par. soqafy ‘he causes to. select.’ ~~ ¢ 3 28. grx ‘to fall fa; RUCEIC he causes to fall MT; 5» FEF ‘he causes to go. i qty; ,, GEE ‘he accomplishes, he 29. fyg‘tobeaccom- prepares. plished,” &e. ; qT; ., YgaE ‘he makes perfect’ (only used of sacred things). § 433] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 183 Root. Caus. Base. 30. wig ‘to swell; 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Caus. whit; Par. swag ‘he causes to swell.’ hal hed ; THRIFT OF 5, TRAM | ; 31. ‘to shine; $ ? TY ‘ to shine; wife; EER { he causes to shine. qr; EFM ‘he causes a smile by.’ ‘he astonishes.’ ‘he causes to strike.’ ‘he makes ashamed.’ ¢ 1 J 32. Ry ‘to smile; sll; Ar. wend 33. gq ‘tostrike} eify; Par saa 34. gr ‘tobeashamed; fy; » ROA (0)—Conjugation of the Causal Base. : § 432. The Causal Base is conjugated like the Derivative Pase of a root of the 10th (churddi) class in all the tenses and moods of the Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, and Passive; e.g. rt. & ‘to do,’ Caus. B. IT; Pres. Ind. Par. spregfy ‘he causes (a person) to do (something for somebody else); Atm. gga ‘he causes (a person) to do (something for himself); Pass. ga ‘be is made to do.’ § 433. Paradigm: The 3 Sing. of all the tenses and moods in Par., Atm, and Pass., of the Causal of rt. gy ‘to know,’ Causal Base FT. Parasmai. Atmane. Passive. Pres. Ind. TALS ATTIX areAd Pres. Pot. ATAT TAT qeAT Pres. Imp. STA or AAT AAA AAA, Tmperf. HITAT HATA ATS Par. Par. or Atm. Atm. or Pass. Pass. Per, Perf, ANGATFFHI AFA, AIA(=H AGATA, ATA TIA CIERIEEC) Par. Atm. Pass. Aor. 1 Sing. SIT, was HEA or wef , 3 Sing. FILA, HITT ATT Parasmai. Atm. or Pass. Passive. Simple Fut. srrrsafa GEfaega arfasad Periph. Fut. Srafaar qrafaar CHEE Condit. HAT ATT AANA AFIT Bened. EAT Fade arse 184 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 434— (c)—ZFurther Illustrations of the Rules concerning the Formation of the Aorist (§ 414), and some additional Rules. § 434. (a) Examples of § 415 («): rt. gq; Caus. B. qrfa; Aor. Par. ardigas. rt. i; ww wm C11 FR ” AHI. fog? YGF ee, AFT. whogn Wh len BES, HAHA rt, rT; 3 ’ Ai; 3] 2 Hrd. rt. qs» ’ qf; 39 39 HAqgId- {b) The penultimate vowel of Sig ‘to live,’ dig ‘to shine, dig ‘to press,” {TY ‘to speak, {ra ‘to shine,’ ry, ‘to shine,’ Hig ‘to close,’ gy, ‘to sigh,’ guy ‘to sound,’ yup ‘to speak,’ gq ‘to break’ and some other roots may optionally follow (a), or remain unchanged; e. g. vt. off; Caus. B. sfify; Aor. Par. ssfiftrag or sifwsfiae. vhs 0 WI som FATT Or AFIT. eum, a ls sw ARMFFAT Or HIATT. tho WO; 5, on WG on» 0 GEA OF TWO. TG a on BEG wo» AGGIE OF AFBI. (¢) The penultimate vowel of zr ‘to command,’ gry ‘to hurt,” grr to ask,’ IE ‘to approach’ and some other roots must remain wunchanged; e.g. rt. FrrE; Caus. B. mfg; Aor. Par. starred. rt. 2; ” 3 2; 7 > AIHA {d) Examples of § 415 (d): vt. aq; Caus. B. fq; Aor. Par. wu&qq or sidigaq. wh TE, WE no» ARPEIRY or AlAEE. rh IFA; » ” ATi; ” ’” AAATAT or AHFAT. rt. I 3 3 Fieg; » 2) HAGERTY, Or THEI. § 435. (a) Examples of § 416 (a): rt, fag; Caus. B. 3fg; Aor. Par. HANI. gg ro» 8G os» FET {b) Examples of § 416 (): rt. gg; Caus. B. gifs; Aor. Par. sifigsq. df; , » WB. , wdEEE -§ 437.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 185 rt. g; Caus. B. Hify; Aor. Par. AfiETT Th. |; » ” anf; 3 » AfqA - (c) The roots J ‘to hasten,’ q ‘to purify,’ i ‘to be, 7 ‘to bind,’ g ‘to bind’ &e., & ‘to sound,’ and g ‘to cut’ take regularly the vowel g in the reduplicative syllable; e.g, rt. 33; Caus. B. uify; Aor. Par. srefisrag. The roots =g ‘to move,’ g ‘to run,’ q ‘to go,” g ‘to swim,’ 3 ‘to hear,” and & ‘to flow’ take in the reduplicative syllable optionally gor 2 SHEAS rt. =z; Caus. B. sqr{a; Aor. Par, sifyrsyaq or sig=aaq. Other roots in g or 3 take in the reduplicative syllable 3 if the root begins with one consonant, and g, if it begins with more consonants ;e.g. rt. g; Caus, B. zrfa; Aor. Par, #FIAT. rt. 5 2 ’ I; 3 ” Ag aad. (d) The vowel 3 of the reduplicative syllable of &gg ‘to hurry,” 7 ‘to burst,” gop ‘to be famous,’ Zr ‘to rub,’ gy ‘to spread,’ Tq © to restrain,” and gg ‘to remember’ remains unchanged ; e.g. rt. egy; Caus. B. egfy; Aor. Par. sige. NE; os os EG so» AAERY. § 436. (¢) Examples of § 417 (a): rt. srg; Caus. B. aqif3; Aor. Par. afzg. oh SEG nn SRG » ATARI. rt. Eq, » 3 aly; 3 3 eT. “rt. ge; ” bE 21a; 2} 9) afer. (b) Examples of § 417 (0): rt. gg; Caus. B. gffm; Aor. Par. AFT. rt. 5 ” 39 A; 3 3) ATH. rt. A; Cp) oy AT; i 2) AE. rt. ge (for 3g=t;) 5, sfew; », ,, SATRSwEL rt. 2K; 1] ” AMG; 11) ” AMY . § 437. Alphabetical list of roots, the Reduplicated Aor. of the Causal of which is formed irregularly : 1. rt. g with prep. Are ‘to read,” Caus. B. speqrfy; Aor. Par. syeqr- faqq or spersirarge (compare § 403, 3), 24 8 186 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 438— 2. rt. ef ‘toenvy;’ Caus. B. gftq; Aor. @ffexg or faq. 3. hw ‘toeovery |, FONE; AAT Livrt am tosmell yy op ond arr ¥ wfsrerge or afta. Bb. xh, JT ‘to stir w hid Sif i af=eg or weve. 6. rt. gq ‘to shine; , fa; i; aif. 7. ri. gp ‘todrinks. 0 ol wif): » AT. 8. yh ag ‘tosarronnd?,, '.» 3; os wfAdea OF ATI - 9" ri. (3% ‘togrowy Tv ,; 'sufh: . alvaTa or WAT. 10. ri. oy Stestand? 0 TITY; “ aff. ¢ I TRI or ,, | . 11. ri. opr toshines ,. hy n he 2. rh.@@q ‘tosleep’ 0, “ne; AGIIq. 13. ro. & ‘toeall; wie gig in SITET OF HITT - § 438. The 3 Sing. Aor. Passive: (a) Examples of § 420 (a): rt, fag; Caus. B. ArT; 3. Sing. Aor, Pass. sr3fy. rt. 99: 2...» Ti; 39 ay 2 » HAI. rt. gm; 9” sy CULE » a PB 2 ATTY. (b) The vowel 21 of roots which retain this vowel unchanged in the Causal base (§ 429) while according to the general rule they ought to lengthen it, and the (short) et of the Causal bases of the roots enume- rated in § 430 (c), is optionally lengthened in the 3 Sing. of the Aor. Pass. of the Causal; e.g. rt. gz; Caus. B. gf; 3. Sing. Aor. Pass. sygfx or syqfs., he SI; 2» ify; 29 ay 2 3 IAM or AAT. 2.—THE DESIDERATIVE. § 439. A desiderative form, which likewise is conjugated in all the tenses and moods of the three voices, may be derived from any primitive root of the first nine classes, from the derivative base of any root of the 10th (churddi) class, and from any causal base. It conveys the notion that a person or thing wishes or is about to perform the action or to undergo the state expressed by the root or the derivative base. Z.g. Rt. Pres. Ind. Par. Pres. Ind. Des. Par. % ‘todo; FUT ‘he does ;’ H3iSfa ‘he wishes to do.” Jy ‘to be ; wa ‘he is; Fair ¢he wishes to be.’ gq “to know ;’ graf ‘he knows; gairaafa ‘he wishes to know.? wg ‘to gos m=siy‘he goes; fanfare ‘he wishes to go.’ qq ¢ to fall} qf ‘he falls? Togfqafa © he is about to fall.” § 443] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 187 Deriv. B. |u¥ ( of rt. gT cl. 10) ‘to steal; Pres, Ind. Par. spigxfa ¢ he steals; Pres. Ind. Des. Par. g=igfafa ‘ he wishes to steal.’ Caus. B. gyfer (from rt. gq) ‘ to cause to know ; Pres. Ind. Caus. Par. grqafa ¢ he causes to know; Pres. Ind. Des. Par. of Caus. gararafy ¢ he wishes to cause to know.’ § 440. In order to impart to a root or verbal base the peculiar sense: of wishing, desiring, &c., which is denoted by the Desiderative, a desi- derative base has to be derived from it, to which base the terminations of the tenses and moods are attached according to certain rules which will be given below; e.g. rt. 3; Desid. Base gH, Pres. Ind. Des, Par. guia; Impf. sigs; Perf, FHITER, Le. (a)— Formation of the Desiderative Base. § 441. The Desiderative Base is formed by adding to the root or base the syllable & (changeable to g by § 59 ), and by at the same time reduplicating the root or base; e.g. rt. fig ‘to split; Desid. B. fafdreg ‘to wish to split.’ rt. J ‘to enjoy; » gga ‘to wish to enjoy.’ rh. 3 ‘to be? i » FYI ‘to wish to be.’ Caus. B. gyfer ‘to cause to know; Desid. B. gapafyg ‘to wish to cause to know.’ : § 442. In the application of the preceding general rule it is necessary to observe the following special rules, which will show, (1) when the inter- mediate vowel g must or may be inserted before the syllable g (or w); (2) what changes the letters of the root or base undergo; and (3) how the general rules of reduplication (§ 230) are modified in the formation of the desiderative base. 1.— Addition to the root or base of the syllable gq (or 7). § 443. The syllable @ is added without the intermediate g— («) To anit roots (§ 298, a), and to all roots ending in gor, except those to which any of the following special rules apply; e.g. rt. gr ‘to drink j Desid. B. foqrey ‘ to wish to drink, to thirst.’ vt. ®i: to lend J wi oo fryR Sto wish to lead. rt. gs ‘to cook; » » T9qer ‘to wish to cook.’ 188 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§444— rt. § © to praise; Desid. B. gqq ‘to wish to praise.’ rt. & ¢ to cut 5 » F&A ‘to wish to cut.) (5) > - iy Tg ‘to hide’ and zg ‘to seize (Desid. Bases: Fg and =i (¢) To the five roote gq ¢ to be fit,” ga ‘ to be; gy ‘to grow,’ Ty, and ge ¢ to drop,’ in Pris Tn Atmanepada the first four roots must insert zg, and eg may do so optionally. Z.g. rt. gq; Desid. B. in Par. fagem; Pres. Ind. {agfa; ” » Atm, faafas; 2) Aafia. hogy, on» Pan Eem; o.oo Ear % Atm. fya=egor,, ,, foes or fat; feafaa § 444. The syllable @ may be added with or without the inter- mediate g— («) To all optionally-anit roots (§ 298, b), except ura, srr (§ 445), TE, and except gag in Parasmai. (§ 443); e.g. > rt. 57 ‘ to tear; Desid. B. {gaisqy or EEL ‘to wish to tear.’ rt, aT * to enjoy;’ ,, ,, XAT or {aged ‘to wish to enjoy.’ (6) To the root and to all roots ending in =, except F and J (§ 445); the intermediate g may optionally be lengthened er thon roots; e.g. rt. F ‘to choose; Desid. B. fafa or [aa or FI ‘to wish to choose.’ rb. ‘to cross’, ,, [AEN or [AGT or [FAF‘to wish to cross.’ (¢) To roots ending in ge ; when & is added without g, the final go of these roots is changed to q; ed. rt. fg ¢ to play;’ Desid. B. fggfag or FIN © to wish to play.’ (d) To = ‘to cover, sg ¢ to prosper, gg © to cut,’ gq to kill, Fg ‘to play,” fy (deriv. B. of rt. gq cl. 10, and optional causal B. of rt. Fr), a ‘to stretch,’ 3g ‘to kill,” g33 ‘to deceive,’ FFT ‘to be poor,’ Tq ¢ to dance,’ gq ¢ to fall’ 37 to bear,’ yes ‘ to fry,’ F ¢ to join,’ =r ‘ to go,” | ¢ to obtain’ e.g. rt. Fa < to cut ;’ Desid. B. fysfaw or frzeq ‘to wish to cut.’ eh. fy fio'gely 5, 5, TRUSS or farsfiy ‘to wish to go.’ (6) @& isadded with g in Parasmai., but without g in Atmane., to the roots spay ¢ to stride,’ aay ¢ to go,’ and q ¢ to flow ;’ e.g. § 446.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 189 rt. 553; Desid. B. in Par. fRysfare ; Pres. Ind. fase; wh ont Atm, asa; woh it fRASEE § 445. The syllable @ is added with the intermediate g— To the roots aq ‘to anoint,” Igy ‘to pervade,’ sg ‘to go,’ F ‘to scatter,” 37 ¢ to devour,’ T to respect,’ ig ‘ to hold,’ q (cl. 1) ‘to purify,’ ag ‘to wr {Hq to smile,’ to all roots which do not fall under §§ 443 and 444, and to all derivative bases of roots of the 10th (churddi) class and all causal bases (except FY); e.g. rt. F; Desid. B. fiw. it. fF; AE. rt HIE; 5 a (AEN ‘to wish to play.’ Note: The intermediate g is not lengthened in the Desid. B. of & and 1, € € 2.—Changes of the root or base before g (or |). § 446. Vowels of roots and bases undergo the following changes before the syllable & (or §): (2) Final g and § are lengthened, and final 5g and sg are changed to 3T or, after labials, to FT, when the syllable @ is added without intermediate g; e.g. rt. {31 ¢ to conquer ; Desid. B. farifig ¢ to wish to conquer,’ rt. g fto run? » » ZEN ‘to wish to run. rt. ‘to do; » 5 DEY “to wish to do. rt, g ‘to cross; » 3» FAAS to wish to cross.’ rt. 3 ‘to die; » » GH ‘to be about to die.’ rt. T ‘to fill; wos 9 ‘to wish to fill.’ (b) Final g, 5 3, F, 3K, and 3 are gunated, when the syllable gq is added to the root or base with the intermediate €327 rt. f&r ¢ to smile; Desid. B. fgg © to wish to smile.’ rt, g © to join 5 » AFEAY to wish to join. rt. q {cl. 1¥ to purify; ,, » T9qfrY © to wish to purify.’ rt. ‘to respect ; 3 » TETRY “to wish to respect.’ rt. @ ‘to cross ; » » taaRF or {aad ‘to wish to cross.’ Caus. B. {Yr ¢ to cause to know; FATT ‘to wish to cause to know.’ 190 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ §447— (c) Penultimate ( prosodially short ) g, 9, |, and & are gunated, when g is added to the root with the intermediate g; e.g. rt. gq ¢ to wish ;’ Desid. B. gfgfqg ¢ to desire to wish.’ rt. gq © to be; 3 5» TIFT © to wish to be. th gp tito bedity » THFHRYT to wish to be fit, rt. fag toplay 2...» » fE3fa® © to wish to play.’ The same vowels remain unchanged when gg isadded to the root with- out g (Desid. B. fageq, fag, &c.). Observe § 444, ¢ (Desid. B. gI9)- e (2) The substitution of Guna for penultimate z or 3, taught under (c), is optional in the case of roots beginning with consonants and ending with any consonant except T; ed. rt. gq ‘ to shine ; Desid. B. fags or @Feifaw ¢ to wish to shine.’ vt. fag ‘to be moisty’ ,, ,, {fgEfyT or RE © to wish to be moist.’ The same vowels remain unchanged when @ is added without g (Desid. B. {ufgem). Exception: The penultimate vowel of {3 fag ‘to know,’ ge ‘to steal,’ and FF ¢ to weep’ remains unchanged; Desid. B. afar, gga, an, § 447. (a) Radical vowels of roots which do not fall under any of the we given in the preceding paragraph remain unchanged (final T, °, and et being w1 by § 297, 0); e.g. rt. gq ¢ to cook ; Desid. B. fgqer ¢ to wish to cook.’ rbogz Sto rend’ » [QR ¢ to wish to read.’ eh, SE to dive) 5 TSS © to wish to live.’ rt. gr ‘to smell? ,, » EE to wish to smell.’ rt. § C‘tosingy? , ,, REE © to wish to sing’ rt, 2% “to perish; ,, » f@dtg © to wish to perish. (b) Final radical consonants combine with the g of the syllable g according to the rules in § 309 ff. 3.—Special rules of reduplication. § 448. Roots or bases beginning with consonants, after they have undergone the changes required by the preceding paragraphs, are reduplicated according to the general rules laid down in §§ 230 and 231; afterwards g is substituted for the vowel st of the. reduplicative syllable. E.g. rt. qx; by § 445 & 447 qf; by $30, e qufdw ; Des, B. fqqiRw. rt. qT; » § 443a& 447 qE; 5» § x qq14; » on RR EX; » § » ». AH » § » aad; nt gy AA. § 450.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 191 rt. §; by § 444 0 & 446 a 1g; by § 231, ¢ {AW BW a $M3a&Mbend; .§. gah rt. fag 5, §444c ay» 3» TEE Deriv. B. fe (of rt. gg el. 10); by §§ 445 and 446, 5 =r; Desid. B. g=itzfiy. Cavs. B. qu (from rt. df); by §§ 445 and 446, b gfe by § 231, e qaTAfyY; Desid. B. fai. Note: The change of initial radical gq to y taught in § 232 does not take place in the Desid. of a primitive root when the characteristic g of the Desid. is changed to wg; e.g. rt. fa, fadafa; vt. fa, feat; ot. g, gguia.—But rt. 31, ura; vt. qT, [quegia; and Desid. of the Causal base of g, gurafysfy, &c.—But &g forms geafy. Noy § 449. Causal Bases in wtf, derived from roots in § or =, are slightly irregular as far as regards the vowel of the reduplicative syllable of the Desid. Base (compare § 435, ¢ ): (a) The causal bases of g, Ty qT, 7, 3G § and g follow the general rule ( § 448 ); e.g. Caus. B. aig ( from rt. ¥ ); Desid. B. of the Caus. framafy. (0) The causal bases of 59S, 9, and q follow the general rule or take the vowel 3 in the reduplicative aglintile; eg. Caus. B. Fifa ( from rt. g ); Desid. B. of the Caus. RaEEy or FETA. (¢) The causal bases of other roots in 3 or 3 take the vowel g in the reduplicative syllable; e.g. Caus. B, ify ( from rt. 3g ); Desid. B. of the Caus. CEAEIRLS § 450. Roots or bases beginning with vowels, after having undergone the changes required by the preceding paragraphs, are reduplicated according to the rules in § 417 a and & (not ¢); e.g. rt. 1x ‘to go; Desid. B. s1212y ¢ to wish to go.’ rh. gH; by §§ 445 and 446 (c) gigs; Desid. B. afyiyy. rt. ggg ‘to see ;’ Desid, B. fa. rt. sg ‘to go;’ by §§ 445 and 446 (b) wifyw; Desid. B. sifgfiy. rt. 31gy ¢ to anoint ;’ Desid. B. siferfa. rt. 3K ‘to go’ by §§ 445 and 446 (c) ew; Desid. B. wife. 192 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 451 -= Caus. B. gfy (from rt. gu); by §§ 445 and 446 (b) wafyy; Desid. B. Ti. § 451. The following roots and bases form their Desiderative Base irregularly : 1. ug “to eat’ forms its Desid. B. from ga, fraem (§ 310, o); 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. {Seema ¢ he wishes to eat’ 2. 371g ‘to obtain,’ Desid. B. eg; 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. geata ‘he wishes to obtain.’ 3. g ‘to go’ forms its Desid. B. from Hy; . g- 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. farfarafa, Atm. {rari he wishes to go’ But when it Teuns ‘to understand,’ it is regular ; e.g. Desid. of g, with aia, grata ‘he wishes to understand.’ When g, with Aer, means to read,’ it hs fstmiEa; e.g. sibafsraiga € he wishes to read.’—The root wy ‘to go) when it is not a substitute for g, forms in Atm, regularly f3aiqq : 3 e g. gis ¢ he wishes to meet.’ The Desid. of the Causal of g, with prep. sf¥ (§ 431, 1), is either 31- SITET or SAMRraEeia < he wishes to teach’ (compare § 403, 3). 4. Ze “to envy; Desid. B. Siearry or feat; 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Par. Sféq@afy or STeATY9fy ¢ he wishes to envy.’ Root. Desid. B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des. gor FUTHFT ) ; ~ h 1 t . Ff “to cover; | FUT or Fula 2 oa ox Yo cover, FOF; Fuga 7 ERS] or ERSIN ¥ he wishes to pros- ff; siiglawfa per” visite 1 Foy or Rnd ) ‘he wishes to , T o swallow ; ; few; fRarfesfy | swallow. 8. gz ‘to seize; Srey; forarfa “he wishes to seize.’ re or fief =I; agai 10. 31 “to conquer; fiir; fadfsfa ¢he wishes to conquer.’ 11. ify base of cl. 10.or ak or Heat; optional Caus. B. of |fgqfs {Sg qiAaid. ZT; but Fry opt. Caus. B. of gq; fagmafas; fraafaafa. [= 2 KY ‘ to prosper; -l 9. f ‘to gather; k he wishes to gather.’ § 451.) Root. 12. gq ‘to stretch ;’ 13. gg ‘to kill; 14. gwy ‘to deceive; 15. giXgT ‘to be poor; 16. gr “to give; 17. 3 “to protect ; 18. gt ‘to cut’ 19. gq “to shiney’ 20. qr ‘to place; 21. § ‘to suck; 22. qx ‘to perish ;’ D} 3. qa “to fall ; L © 4, ag ‘to go; 5. gg ‘toask; LO LO 26. sex “to fry; 27. |S, © to dive 28. Hr ‘ to measure ;’ 29. fig “to throw; 30. #f ¢ to destroy ;’ 31. § “to exchange; 32. gg when used intransitively ; otherwise only 25 8 CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 193 Desid. B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des. fgg or RFE |Rais or foarata ‘he wishes tostretch,’ faafan; afasfa fagafa fo or fae; fers or ee pu 1 he wishes to kill.’ fade ) ™ qi ) fie or degla ‘he wishes to deceive.’ fygfevy; Rela J fs or fFIRFTEAMR f he wishes to be frgRiEy; fRg@wfx) poor.’ fama ‘he wishes to give.’ fed; 7 Raa ‘he wishes to protect.’ {fa ‘he wishes to cut.’ (frgfa or fEgla Reiter; Reif ene wishes to shine.’ ¢ 71 lace fo {sen fag or faagfa ‘he wishes or is J fafa | about to perish.’ Tyg or fycafa | ‘he wishes or is I" qfaw; fuafaafa | about to fall’ fod; fama ‘he wishes to go.’ frgfRo; fqgi=eufa ‘he wishes to ask.’ faseg or fawerfa | forse or fawafa fasisy or fraffa rafhe; Ewa ag; fangh ‘he wishes to dive.’ | firegfa ‘he wishes to measure.’ ‘he wishes to fry. fireqfa ¢ he wishes to throw. [LICH [Fret ‘he wishes to destroy.’ firma ‘he wishes to exchange. or gga I longs for final liberation.’ Area yggeata ‘he wishes to free.’ th SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 452— Root. Desid B. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Des. ana an (fager or (mela ) ‘he wishes to 33, to wipe ; - ; w= pes rife; Rrarfsafy | wipe? 34. gag ‘to desire Red; Rega ‘he wishes to desire.’ 35. qr “to injure; Req ; Reglr ‘he wishes to injure. otherwise Rea; Reefer he wishes to favour.’ 36. @y ¢ to obtain ;’ fom; fg ‘he wishes to obtain.’ 37. zig “to be able T3187 5 freafr ‘he wishes to be able. 38. apifyr, Caus. B. of [fRramfraor Ll wishes to cause far “to swell ; | gmafim gaafasfa ) to swell” hg (fama or fama ‘he wishes to 39. gg, ‘to obtain; - & in | fafa , TaEfata obtain. 40. TRIE, optional Claus, oa or ‘he wishes to cause B. of gg ‘to shine; | FERIAT ; FERIA) 4 shine.’ 41. gq ‘to sleep ; gu; gaara ‘he wishes to sleep.’ 42. @rfy, Caus. B. of | nn pn | he wishes to cause Tq ‘to sleep 1g EY; gear | to sleep.’ 13. gay “to kill ; frie; faatafa ‘he wishes to kill. 14. fF “to throw ; fash; forefiwfa ‘he wishes to throw.’ 15. gf, Caus. B, of & (“he wishes to cause “to call ; gETafas; FEE 1 toeall? 46. & “to call} JET; ggufa ‘he wishes to call. § 452. A Desiderative Base which, however, does not convey a desi- derative sense, is derived from the following roots: rt. Ts Desid. B. Ja ‘to blame ;’ Pres. Ind. FUCA. rb. JT, yy» Tider ‘to endure 5 2 2 fafaerd. : ~ ~~ ¢ yD o atte OS rh. TFA, 5» 5 (ufEe@ ‘to heal; &c. » op AEE, od 1h AW 5 HATE ‘to investigate 2» » HATE. rh FY, » 5 FE ‘to feel disgust; » ATES. rh. EF, » » HAGE ‘to straighten; . yy ATES. vb FOF, » 5 Fai ‘to sharpen 2 » FEE. As these seven desiderative bases are looked upon as primitive verbs, new desiderative bases may be derived from them; e.g. Desid. of ITH, FUT ‘he wishes to blame’ ( see § 230, d), From other desiderative bases no new Desideratives can be formed. § 455.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 195 (b)—Conjugation of the Desiderative Base. § 453. The Desiderative Base, after it has been formed in. the manner described in the preceding section, may be conjugated in all the three voices ; as regards, however, the Parasmaipada and Atmane- pada, the Desiderative Base is restricted to the same voice to which the root or base from which it is derived is restricted ( provided there be such restriction ); e.g. Rt. gx ¢ to sacrifice;” Pres. Ind. Par. qqfg * he sacrifices’ ( for some- body else); . , Atm. gma ‘he sacrifices’ (for himself); 2 3» Pass. TAQ. Desid, B. farey < to wish to sacrifice; ,, » Par. fief he wishes to sacrifice’ (for somebody else); 2 ,» Atm. frgeraq ‘he wishes to sacrifice’ (for himself ); sw Pass RFE. Rt. gy ¢ to grow’ wl Atm Taq ¢ he grows.’ Desid. B. afzfayg ‘ to wish to grow ; ) » Atm. afefyed ¢ he wishes to grow.’ § 454. Exceptions : (¢) The Desid. Bases of 57 ¢to know (unless the prepos. Ag be prefixed to it), sp ¢ to hear (unless the prepos. a or a1 be prefixed to it), gg ¢ to remember,’ and zz ‘ to see’ are conju- gated only in the Atmanepada 3.84 Pres. Ind. of Desid. of sr, faggraa ¢ he wishes to know.’ andl iat § oasT) FATS ‘he wishes to listen to, he is obedient.’ (b) The Desid. Bases of ZF, Iq, T4, WL, wd &|=g (§ 443, ¢) may optionally be conjugated in the Parasmaipada ; e. g. rt. gig © to grow; Pres. Ind, (only) Atm. 3: ¢he grows,’ Pres. Ind. of Desid. Par. or Atm, fagegiq or faafaag ¢ he wishes to grow.’ § 455. In the three moods of the Present tense and in the Impert. Par. and Atm. the Desid. Base is conjugated like the special base of a root, of the 6th (#udddi) class. In the remaining tenses of the Par. and Atm. and in the Passive the final a1 of the Desid. Base is dropped; subse- quently the tenses are formed from the base, as remaining after the loss of its final a7, in the manner stated below. Tt must, however, be borne in mind that, wherever the characteristic @ (or gq) of the 196 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 456— Desiderative is added to a root or base by means of the intermediate g or g, this g or § is liable to no change whatever. 1. The Parasmai. and Atmane. (a) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs &, srg, and 3 according to § 328. (h) In the Aorist the Desid. B. takes the augment, and the termi- nations of Form V. (§ 352, b). (¢) In the Simple and Periphrastic Futures the terminations given in § 368, 0, and § 373, b, are added with the intermediate zg. (?¢) The Conditional is formed according to § 378. (¢) In the Benedictive the terminations given in § 380, ¢, are added to the Desid. Base, those of the Atmane. with the intermediate g- 2. The Passive. (2) The Present and Imperfect ave formed from the Desid. Buse according to the rules in § 387, a, and § 388. (6) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs &, @q, and 37 according to § 392. (¢) The 3 Sing. of the Aor. is formed according to the rule given in § 393. (2) The remaining forms of the Aorist and all the other tenses of the Passive do not differ from the corresponding forms of the Atmanepada. § 456. Paradigm : The 3 Sing. of all the tenses and moods in Par., Atm., and Pass. , of the Desider. of rt. g4 ‘to know,’ Desid. Base Fq0- arg or gga. (Note - It will be sufficient to give the forms of only one of these two bases, because those of the other base are formed in exactly the same manner.) Parasmai. Atmane. Passive. Pres. Ind. gavfrafy FACT FAIA Pres. Pot. gatfise gaifayg gaa Pres. Imper. FATT or “qATq, Fagan FArtreaan Iperf. STIAIRIT FART AgAISAd § 458.] CONJUGATION OF VERES, 197 Par. Par. or Atm. Periph. Perf. JATIHHIT FACITAIG or FAITTIT Atm. or Pass. Pass. Periph. Perf. ~ Fatqi=Eh FACIE or FARTS Par. Atm, Pass. Aor. 1. Sing. srgaifufyy ergarfufefy srgarffly 3. Sing. wrgEifydiy wgEtafyw srg 2 Parasmai. Atmane. or Passive. Simple Fut. gatrrysata Fans Periphr. Fut, ~~ gatiafar Farrar Condit, SAT, STACI SIT Bened. TAIT, Fae 3.—THE FREQUENTATIVE. § 457. A Frequentative may be derived from any monosyllabic root of the first nine classes which begins with a consonant. It conveys the notion that a person or thing performs the action or undergoes the state which is expressed by the root, repeatedly or intensely. Z.g. Rt. Prog. Ind, Par. Pres. Ind. Frequent. F ‘to do; ifr ‘he does; Jy or HAF ‘he does repeatedly or intensely.’ jy ‘tobe wafyg ‘heis; qi or dhaify he is repeatedly.’ But no Frequent. can be derived, e.g., from Sry ‘to wake’ because this root has two syllables, nor from ggg ¢ to anoint,’ because this root commences with a vowel. : : § 458. (a) Exceptionally a Frequentative may be formed from the roots sz ‘to go,’ 3g ‘to go,” Igy ‘to pervade,’ 0} “to cover, gg cl. 10. ‘to indicate,’ gra cl. 10., and gq cl. 10. ‘to string together.’ (6) The Frequentative of a root signifying motion conveys the im- port of tortuous motion ; e.g. Frequ. of rt. sx ‘to walk, grasga he walks tortuously’ (not ‘he walks repeatedly’). The Frequentatives of the roots gq ‘to cut, Tg ‘to sity’ JT ‘to go,’ J ¢ to mutter,’ Fy ‘to yawn,’ TT ‘to burn,’ Zr “to bite,’ and 71 ¢ to swallow’ convey the notion £ of reproach, &c.; e. g. Frequ. of 39, FIFTY “he cuts disgracefully.’ 198 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§459— § 459. In order to impart to a root the peculiar meaning which is denoted by the Frequentative, a frequentative base has to be derived from it, to which base the terminations of the various tenses and moods are attached in the manner stated below ; e.g. vt. 37; Freq. B. graye; Pres. Ind. Freq. Atm. Ar agFa; Tmpf. sravgaa de. or TN; 9 nt » Yor AA; 53 AIT; or FAA; » AF AATGLC § 460. The Frequentative Base has two forms; both agree in a peculiar reduplication of the root ; they differ from each other in this, that one form ends in g and is conjugated in the Atmanepada only, while the other form does not end in zy and is conjugated in the Parasmaipada only.* It will be convenient to call the first form the Atmanepada, Frequentative Base, and the second the Parasmai- pada Frequentative Base. Z.g. rt. 37, Atmanepada Treq. B, YT. Parasmaipada Freq. B. ay. rt, fag, Atmanepada Freq. B. ayer. Parasmaipada Freq. B. rag. 1. (a)—Formation of the Atmanepada Frequentative Base. § 461. (a) The syllable a1 is added to the root; eg. rt. of, fier; rt. 3, 37; vb. fag, fe; vb as, a=. (0) Before this gr the root undergoes the following changes :— 1. Final g, §, =, and sg are changed as they are changed before the syllable 7 of the Passive (§ 387), except that final sg, when preceded by only one radical consonant, is changed to $ (not to {3); e.g. rt. far, #0; rt. g> TF; rb. &, JT; rt. &g, qq; rte Fs F19; It. q; 93. 2. The final vowel of gr ‘to give, g, 3, oT, °, A, TAT, a, qr ‘to drink,’ gt ‘to abandon, gy, and of gt ¢ to smell’ and «xr ‘to blow’ is changed to §. The final &y (w, &, and &f, § 297, 0) of other roots remains #7 (see, however, 4); e.g. rt. gr, Sa; rt. |, fiz; rb. # IT; rt, @Y, ia; rt. FT, TE; rt I, IFT; 1h. BY, BE. 2 3. A penultimate nasal is generally dropped (see § 381); e.g. rt. gay, Fey. But rt. qT, Aq. 4. The roots qx, =r, and gy substitute g for a; ®r and 2 * Some grammarians admit also the Atmanepada. § 463.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 199 substitute g for gr and 3 ; gy substitutes g for gr; F substitutes x for J ag, TF, ASL and zxgx substitute sg for g; and zyreg substitutes g for 11; e.g. vb. Fg, f=7; vb. san, Sw; vb T@Y, GEA; rh BA; rt, Ig, ga; rt. Wa, Rey. 5. Observe § 46; e.g. rt. fgg, dix. § 462. The form in 7, derived from the root according to the rules of the preceding paragraph, is reduplicated according to the general rules of reduplication (§§ 230 and 231); subsequently the vowels g and § of the reduplicative syllable are gunated, and the vowel sr of the re- duplicative syllable is lengthened ; e. g. rt. gr; by § 461 gig; by § 231 Fd; A. Freq. Base 3a. hl; wns TAM) vo un TH nin 5s SATATH. rt. aq; 33 53 ss 1 sy. 9 3 Zea; 33 ’» 3 FH. HY; wan WE wen GEE» nw AN rt. Hs 3 33) Hi; 09» =a; wo ’ AFT. rt. g; rh qq ; hee 97; oy 5 Tg eh. SVE in RE wn SEY i » Ete. him; nun EWU nEZEEWM . 4» SEE rt, AHL; 5» oy» =x; 33 99 ay fafa=a; 3} 3) 8 afa=a. ho ®\YL; on on 9; » » » GUY; saviliiey 3 HTH. Th FIT; » » 1» 13057 ; 3 33 a» farfateT; » gy » RATE. § 463. (a) When a root ends in a nasal preceded by the vowel sy, the vowel gt of the reduplicative syllable is (against § 462) not length- ened, but Anusvéra, or the nasal of that class to which the first radical consonant belongs, is inserted between the vowel st of the reduplicative syllable and the first radical consonant ; this rule applies, however, only when the final radical nasal remains unchanged before the syllable 7 of the Frequent. base. Z£.g. rb. 353; by § 461 weg; by § 231 gyFg; A, Freq. B. gq%q or gyre, Ye AH np » AE; nn» AA; 5 nn GAY OF YG. {AG non on FF; no on AA; nn» HAT OF FF. But when qe combined with zr becomes sry (§ 474), the A, Freq. Base 1s S319 (0) The same rule applies to the roots J, §¥, T IW, WF ‘to break, and ggg cl. 1 ¢ to restrain’; e.g. rt. gg; by § 461 ax; by § 231 gE; A. Freq, B. #zar or gear. 200 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§464— (c) The syllable &f is inserted between the vowel 1 of the redupli- cative syllable ( which against § 462 remains short) and the first radi- cal consonant in the frequentative base of ag ‘to go,’ gq ‘to fall,’ ag “to fall,’ 3g ‘to fall} yg ‘to go,” qq ‘to fall qg ‘to go,” and Say ‘to step; e.g. rt. a9; by § 461 gwar; by § 231 gg=x; A. Freq. B. gras. rt. Ts » a» 9s Qs » » » QE; » 9» th) qq. § 464. The syllable § is inserted between the vowel s1 of the re- duplicative syllable (which against § 462 remains short) and the first radical consonant in the Atmane. frequentative base of roots which after the addition of 7 contain the vowel sg, Similarly &f is inserted in the Atmane. frequentative base of rt. ZT L.g. rt, gg; by § 461 gex; by § 231 gga; A. Freq. B. TaTA. rt. ATs » » » Y=BTA3 199 » IVA; 5» 1» 2 qiiT=s: . rt. Fs nn» BY; 7 33 ys 5; on ” ISL Note:—A list of irregular Atmanepada Frequentative Bases will be given in § 474. 1. (b)—Conjugation of the Atmanepada Frequentative Base. § 465. In the three moods of the Present tense and in the Imperfect of the Atmanepada, the Atm. Frequent. Base is conjugated like the special base of a root of the 4th (divddi) class in Atmanepada. In the remaining tenses of the Atmanepada, and in all the tenses of the Passive, the base loses its final ef when the final 77 is preceded by a vowel, and it loses its final 7, when 3 is preceded by a consonant ; e.g. AGT becomes TTT; ag becomes TIT. The base changed in this way can undergo no further changes, and the Perfect and the remaining tenses are formed from it thus: 1. The Atmanepada. (#) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs &, oq, and q according to § 328. (6) In the Aorist the base takes the augment, and the Atmanepada terminations of Form V. (§ 352, 0). (¢) In the Simple and Periphrastic Futures the Atmanepada termi- nations given in § 368, 0, and § 373, 4, are added to the base with the intermediate g. (d) The Conditional is formed according to § 378. § 466. ] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 201 (¢) In the Benedictive the Atmanepada terminations given in § 380, ¢, are added to the base with the intermediate z, 2. The Passive. (2) The Present and Imperfect are formed from the base according to the rules in § 387, « and § 388. (6) The Perfect is formed by means of the auxiliary verbs , wa, and 3g according to § 392. (c) The 3 Sing, Aor. is formed from the base according to the rule given in § 393. (d) The remaining forms of the Aorist and all the other tenses of the Passive do not differ from the corresponding forms of the Atmanepada. § 466. Paradigms: The 3 Sing. of all the tenses and moods in Atmane. and Passive of the Atmanepada Frequentative of rt. gq ‘to know,” A. Frequent. Base FT, and of rt. 3g “to be,’ A Frequent. Base AA. Atmanepada. = = » = Pres. Ind. Hew NT Eo. + Pres. Pot. FEAT TREAT Pres. Imper, ATTA TAA Imperf. HATA HATA Periph. Perf. ~~ F(IAITH &e. AAATTH &e. Aorist. 1. Sing. SrETITaly SHAT , 3 Sing. wag wre Simple Fut. ~~ Srgfreas Frere Periph. Fut. ArErerar arafar | = Condit. AAIICAT Serre Benedict. Tigra Frfte Passive. “ ~ - - Pres. Ind. TEAS TEAS Pres. Pot. Ard FIAT 26 s 202 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 467— Pres. Imper. - FrgEAATT, TYE, Imperf. ATA HAZAT Periph, Perf. ~~ WIAA &e. ~~ ATATATE &e, Aorist 1. Sing. WaArFRafy ECIEIRIE , 3 Sing. SARI srt Simple Fut. : Ly Pat like Atmanepada. Benedict. | 2. (a)—LFormation of the Parasmaipade Frequentative Base. § 467. The root is reduplicated according to the general rules of reduplication (§§ 230 and 231); subsequently the vowels g and 3 of the reduplicative syllable are gunated, and the vowel sr of the reduplicative syllable is lengthened ; e.g. rb.2r flo gives by § 231 zr; Par. Frequ. B. gar. rt. Jr “to know > 9y sy. vw FAFUS 9 » ANTI. wt. fr ‘lo go; non» frre; 3 ». up ROL rt. qt to lead; wii mins SEES ue # a» A rh.g ‘to agitate ;’ Er TE om 3g. rb. 3g “to be 7 » won GH; » 9 (ly A. rt. F ¢ to scatter,’ oe TF; o aw a ME: ve. Sto sing? (8297.0), 5 nn WG 2 Sy USTHTL rt. fag ¢ to split ;’ 2 nn fafag; » 2 afag. rt. gq ¢ to know ; » wn FJ; » 3 7) I. § 468. The rules given in § 463, (a), (0), and (c), apply likewise to the Parasmai. Frequ. base ; e.g. rt. 3a; by § 231 myyyy; Par. Freq. B, ura or a#uy. rt. 8; nv» TEE; 2» ww... un TEE Or FIRE, rt. ad; 3999 vigy 94 5 3) » 2 ERIEES § 469. The letter T, or the syllable f§ or §, is inserted between the vowel 37 of the reduplicative syllable (which against § 467 re- mains short) and the first radical consonant in the Parasmai. Fre quentative base of roots which end with (short) sg or have ( short) sg § 472] CONJUGATION OF VERBS, 203 for their penultimate letter ; similarly gf or fs or &f is inserted in the Par, Frequ, base of rt. EAC Eg. rt. g; by § 231 9%; Par. Freq. B. TF, or ARE, or aE. rt. Id5 yo Ids » 3 3 F390, or aig, or FaIq . rt. a9; 99.99, iy 9; 9 3) Et) HEEL or afeFq, or TEFL 2. (b)—Conjugation of the Parasmaipada I'requentative Base. $470, In the three moods of the Present and in the Imperfect Par. the Parasmai. Frequent. base is conjugated like the special base of a root of the 3rd (julotydidi) class. The terminations of the Singular Pres. Ind., of the 2 and 3 Sing. Imperf., and of the 3 Sing. Pres. Imperat. may be attached to the base with or without 3; when they are added with g, a penultimate short vowel of the base cannot he gunated. Z.g. 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Freq. Par. of rt. 3g (Par. Freq. B. 9) Tifa or Arata; of rt. go (Par. Freq. B. gigy ) fian® or sigs; of rt. gr (Par, Freq. B. g131) gram or grafa; of rt. gg (Par. Freq. B. gag, or aftad, or arg) TiN, or aftafy, or F{alN, or FFA, or IRIAN, or FOIA; of rt. (Par. Freq. B. 51%, or as, or =9@is,) wid, or FfRata, or =H, or FFfe, or RFT, or AH. § 471. About the formation of the Perfect and the remaining tenses grammarians do not always agree, the chief cause of all difficulties being the doubt, whether the rules which apply to a primitive root apply also to its Parasmaipada Frequentative base. As this form of the verb is of very rare occurrence, it will be sufficient to conjugate one paradigm throughout all its tenses and moods. For special and de- tailed information on this subject the student must consult the works of the native grammarians. § 472. Paradigm: The Parasmaipada Frequentative of rt. 33 ‘to be,” Par, Freq. B. CIE Parasmaipada. Pres. Ind. Pres. Pot. Pres. Imper, Imperf. LAIR or ATTA ACHAT eraaan ATTA SN oN ~ Naa NN wl 5p | 2. AAT or FAT: ATE SEAT or HATA: 7 | Frade 3. AAI or AAT, AIT or SHERI or HATHA, FIAT FET 9 204 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 472— 1. Fa: Saar AWA SE ERP CCE uA, AEE SEE A = = = » 3. FTA: WIAA, Aa, SEE = 1. Sr: rT WAT ATH = ~ ~ ~ ~ Elo. qaqa TAT Arad AAI 8s 6) : aS =~ Wi ~ > ~ > 3. argafa ERE NYA A: Perfect. (1. FAITH or HHT &e., or AAT or FATE, or FTAA oh . hod Si - Dad ATIF Frater CIEER] 3. ATTATAEIT ATT EGC) Du, 1. AAAATFA qf Tafa &e. &e. &e. Aorist, i SAFTAT(AT or ATTA, 9. ITFTATAT: SHA: or STITT: or AFIS or HATITAT: o a i HATA, STI or FIAT or FATA or AATHAT, Du. 1 HAITI PL 3. wETWIAY: wEgE: he or STATA: Simple Fut. Periph. Fut. Condit. Bened. Sg. Lawafasmify drafyaifen Eats Stara Atmanepada. Passive. Pres. Ind. 3. Sg. TA ATS oN o , Pot. , , dg =A he N oe qT, AOI, Impf. , , Ea HATA Perfect. ,, , ANAATTH Ke. ATAAITH de. § 474] Aorist. 3 Simple Fut. 2 » Fras Periph. Fut. ,, Condit. » Bened. > rho ‘tL CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 205 Atmanepada. Passive. . Sg. AATITAT AAT , rar , AATHTISTT » ATTA 2 0 80; rt. 33 ‘ to pervade rt. Ff ¢ to cover ;’ FIIFASTA or ATATIASTA THIRIET or anlar HATTATTSTT or HATAASTT IN SanON_ IN ~ NL FTHTANTE or FTHIEAYIE § 473. The four roots siz, =}, HF, and Su mentioned in § 458, «, form their Frequentative thus : rt. 31 ¢ to go ;’ A. szr=a. » ATT; LD. ela or siRkafg &e. 5» SATII. wo = » FOTIA. § 474. The following roots form their Frequentative irregularly : Root. -& cl. 1. BD P= ope dl «5 ~~ @ = 2% 24 ‘ to sound 3’ ‘ to dig ;’ ¢ to swallow ; ‘to walk; ¢ to worship ;’ “to be born; ‘ to shine; ¢ to burst ; ¢ to lie down 3’ “to swell ; ‘to obtain ; ‘to injure ; otherwise Atm, Frequ. HET. Igeaa or JET Or AGS; sifireaq; IFA or SA; JF; AHA or SSI Or TATA; IgA; FEET OF UHI; TITAS; FAI or TIE; x » SHAT; SgFaq or TRI; Par. Frequ. Iga or ggiea de, ANTI. wif or agra Lo. SFA or FF. FFA or seve de. Nh I SA Igdila or Feaifa. EES or gEE fade. [FAR or AAT. ha o n Frit or Fafa. dgdtfa or gafea. agHifa or aigira. 206 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 475— 4— NOMINAL VERBS. § 475. Verbs are formed from nominal bases by adding to them the characteristic marks of the tenses and moods and the personal termin- ations, or more commonly, by deriving, with the help of some suffix, a verbal base from the nominal base, and by adding the characteristic marks of the tenses and moods and the personal terminations to the derivative verbal base formed in this manner. Thus from the nominal base fa ¢ a bird,’ we may form gxfg ¢ he behaves like a bird,” by add- ing to fa the personal termination fg and by changing {3 before this termination just as a root of the 1st (b/wddi) class would be changed in the Pres. Indic.; or we may form, e.g. from ga ‘a son, gla ‘he wishes for a son,’ by deriving, with the help of the suffix a, from the nominal base gg the derivative verbal base gig ‘to wish for a son, and by forming form this base a Pres. Indic. just as it would be formed from the special base of a root of the Ist class, Verbs thus derived from nominal bases are called nominal verbs; they generally convey the notion that a person or thing behaves or is like, or treats a person’ or thing like, or wishes for, that which is expressed by the nominal base. As these verbs are of comparatively rare occurrence, especially in the general tenses, all the rules for their formation and conjugation need not be given here; it will suffice to indicate generally the manner in which, and to point out the principal suffixes by which verbal bases are derived from nominal bases, and to illustrate the formation and conjugation of the various classes of nominal verbs by a few examples. VERBS DERIVED FROM NOMINAL BASES : («) Without a derivative suffiz, and conjugated in Parasmaipada. § 476, Nominal verbs may be formed from nominal bases without any special derivative suffix, the characteristic signs of the tenses and moods and the personal terminations being added immediately to the nominal base. The penultimate vowel of a nominal base which ends in a nasal must be lengthened. The verbal bases formed in this manner are conjugated in the Parasmaipada, and convey the notion that a per= son or thing behaves or is like that which is expressed by the nominal base. In the special tenses the nominal base is treated like a root of the 1st (bhwdds) class ; when it contains more than one vowel, its last vowel only undergoes the changes which the vowel of a root of the Ist class has to undergo. A final a1 of a nominal base is dropped before the =f which is added to it in the special tenses. Z.g. § 477] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 207 Nominal Base, Derivat. Verbal Base. Prey, Ind, Pur, for ‘a bird; fa ‘to behave like a gfe © he behaves like a bird.’ bird ; (Perf. fararar; Aor. srarefiq or srg ; Bened. Higa) FA © a poet ;’ F(a ‘to behave like aFgxfaq ‘he behaves like a a poet ;’ poet.’ off ¢ Lakshmi ;’ sit ¢ to behave like L.; sgpfer ¢ she behaves like I. 3g ¢ the earth ; ¥ ‘to behave like the wafer ‘she behaves like the earth; earth.” (Perf. gure; Aor. HATA.) fag ‘a father ; 143g © to behave like afgqyfd ‘he behaves like a father ; father. Feor * Krishna’ Four to behave like Feurfg ‘he behaves like Krighna Krishna.’ qr@r¢ a garland 7 @rET ‘to be like a meri it islike a garland.’ garland (Perf. qratasm; Aor. AATBIHIT.) usg ‘aking; Tr, to behave like grsrafa ‘he behaves like a a king ; king. (0) By means of the suffix gq, and conjugated in Parasmaipada. § 477. Nominal verbs may be derived from nominal bases (except those that end in 37 and those that are indeclinable) by adding to them the suffix a, and by conjugating the derivative verbal base formed in this manner in the Parasmaipada only. Before the suffix 7 final letters of nominal bases undergo the following changes :— Final 31 and 37 are changed to 5 e.g. Nom. B, gq, Deriv. V. B. gig. Final g and § are lengthened ; e.g. a) i Hid, 09. 5s. 0 BEI. Final sg is changed to fj e.g. 435 dicen FF, 5.5 innit, Final at and aft are changed to HF and Ire, respectively ; e.g. Nom. Base ait; Deriv. Verb. Base aay. » 2» A; 2 » » qT. A final nasal is dropped and the preceding vowel changed as an origi- nally final vowel would be changed ; e.g. Nom. Base gra; Deriv. Verb. Base grsfia. Other final consonants remain unchanged ; e.g. 208 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 478— Nom. Base gre; Deriv. Verb. Base gr=. 2 39 qa; ”» 3) 3) qa. Penultimate g and 3 of nominal bases in g or 7 are generally lengthened (§ 46); e. g. Nom, Base fig; Deriv. Verb, Base fis. 2 I 2 ” 5 97. § 478. Derivative verbal bases formed in this manner convey the notion that a person wishes for that, or treats a person or thing like that, or looks upon a person or thing as upon that, which is expressed by the nominal bases ; e.g. Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb, Base. Pres. Ind, Par. gq ‘a son 5 gaia ¢ to wish for a ga ¢ he wishes for a son.’ son ;’ (Perf. gefigi=waty; Periph. Fut. gefifaar.) Hq © a poet ; FA ¢ to wish for a FHigly © he wishes for a poet,’ poet : ay ‘a cow; weg ‘to wish for a qyeyfq © he wishes for a cow.’ cow ; (Perf. stripy; Periph. Fut. sifexar.) UAT, ‘a king ;’ Ts ‘to wish for a grsfrafar ¢ he wishes for a king. king ; qf ‘fuel; giver ‘to wish for Hel ¢ he wishes for fuel.’ fuel (Periph. Fut. gmfEtsar or ita.) fare] ‘Vishnu; foesopy ¢ to treat like fasupz fa < he treats (somebody) Vishnu like Vishnu.’ qrarz ‘a palace; ETH ‘to look upon graTdiafa ¢ he looks upon (a (anything) as upon hut, &c.) as if it were a a palace;’ palace.’ § 479. In instances like the following the verbal base formed by a conveys a different meaning : Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base, Pres. Ind. Par. Jqq penance ;’ qo® ‘to practise ggexfy ‘he practises penafice.’ penance ;’ quag ‘adoration; que to adore; aut ¢ he adores.’ § 452] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 209 (e)—By means of the suffix FF, and conjugated in Parasmaipada. § 480. To express the notion of wishing for that which is denoted by a nominal base, a verbal base may be derived from the latter by adding to it the suffix zy, The derivative verbal base so formed is conjugated in the Parasmai. Z.g. Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind. Par. ga ‘ason; gHFEy ‘to wish for a son; gaEEgia ‘he wishes for a son.” (Perf. ggamaiasig; Periph. Fut. gggifRear.) amg ‘fame ;’ ggreprey © to wish for fame ; IEEE ‘he wishes for fame.’ (d)—By means of the suffiz: wg or s'm, ond conjugated in Parasmatpada. § 481. Verbal bases are also derived from nominal bases by the addition of the suffix gr or stg. They are conjugated in the Paras- maipada only, and convey the notion of wishing ardently for that which is expressed by the nominal base. Z.g. Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind. Par. ’ ‘he wishes of ae }es wish ardently ngaE [thew ag ‘honey ; or , or ardently for | | for honey; ; qa FqaEia | honey. 3127 ‘a horse ; spsgey © to long ardently for 19a © (the mare)longs the horse ;’ for the horse.’ (e)—DBy means of the suffix 7, and conjugated in Atmanepada. § 482. By adding to nominal bases the suffix 3, and by conjugating the derivative verbal bases so formed in the Atmane., nominal verbs are formed which convey the notion of behaving like that which is expressed by a nominal base. Before the suffix 77 of this class of nominal verbs the final e7 of a nominal base is lengthened; sy remains unchanged; other final letters undergo the same changes which they undergo before the suffix gy in § 477. The final 5g of wemyyg and syysg must, the final arg of other nominal bases may optionally be changed to wr. When the suflix 71 is added to a feminine base, the corresponding mascu- line base is generally substituted for the latter. Z.g. 2 u 210 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 483— Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind. Atm. gar ‘Krishna; emg to behave Forge ‘he behaves like like Krishna ;’ Krishna.’ AGI ‘an Ap- wemyrg ‘to behave regard ¢ she behaves like saras ;’ like an Apsaras; an Apsaras.’ ag ‘fame,’ or (TFA | ‘to behave ( JIS ] ‘he behaves sfymouss dl or -like one or ‘like one who i J famous 7 ITT Jis famous.’ FA ‘agirly gH ‘to behave FHI ‘he behaves like like a girly a gel’ gata “a maiden ELE] ‘to behave Fara ‘he behaves like a like a maiden ; maiden.’ § 483. The same suffix 77 is also added to a few nominal bases such as" frequent,’ a= ‘slow,’ gitgqg ‘learned,’ gaaq ‘benevolent, IAAF ‘agitated,’ &c., to convey the notion of being or becoming like that, or becoming that, which is expressed by the nominal base. A final consonant of nominal bases to which zy may be added in this sense is dropped. £.j. Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind. Atm. JF ‘frequent; FFF ‘to become TIF ‘it becomes fre frequent ; quent.’ gray ‘agitated ; geraTH ‘to become agi- IAAT © he becomes tated ; agitated.’ (Imperf. gzHa™S.) § 484. The following are a few instances in which the suffix gf con- veys a different meaning :— Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind, Atm. I ‘pain ;’ ZI ‘to suffer pain ; gas ‘he suffers pain.’ THe ‘ruminat- Fear ‘to ruminate; FrwETIY ¢ he ruminates.’ ing ;’ Hog ‘a tear; Fieqry ‘to shed tears; greqrga ‘he sheds tears. a ‘a sound; zr ‘to makeasound ; FETS Che makes a sound.’ gd ¢ pleasure ;’ gam ‘to show one’s gaEa ‘he shows his plea- pleasure ; sure.’ (Jf )—By means of the suffix g or SAY. § 485. Some verbal bases are formed from nominal bases by the addition of the suffix g or snfy (§ 407); they convey various weanings, § 486.] PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES, 211 and are conjugated like the derivative bases in g or Arf of roots of the 10th (churddi) class or of Causals. When the suffix g or rfy is added to the bases of adjectives, the latter generally undergo the same changes which they undergo before the Comparative and Superlative suffixes 99 and gg (§ 173); when it is added to a feminine base, the corresponding masculine base is substituted for the latter. Z.g. Nom. Base. Deriv. Verb. Base. Pres. Ind. Par. gue ‘shaven; glug ‘to shave’ gueata ‘he shaves.’ qe ‘true gETY © to declare as true ; gery fy ‘he declares as true.’ J gy (§ 174, ¢) mfr ‘to declare as broad; sargfyy ‘he declares (anything) ‘broad ;’ broad.’ ut (Fem. wf ‘to declare as vavie- wgagfar ‘he declares (her) of gg, § 135) gated’ variegated.’ ‘variegated ;’ CHAPTER VIII. PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES. § 486. (a) The following are the prepositions which are commonly prefixed to verbal roots and their derivatives: — AMF ‘over, beyond; e.g. AMA-FH, ‘to overstep, to go beyond, to transgress, to surpass.’ II ‘over, above, on; e.g. sr{¥-F ‘to place over, to appoint ; sfy-gE ‘to rise above, to ascend ; AMY-T13 ‘ to obtain.’ ag “after, along, near to; e.g. AFH, ‘to go after or along ;’ HAT-F ‘to do after, to imitate.’ AY ‘away, off e.g. AY-IH ‘to go away; wy-+i ¢ to lead off.’ HT (sometimes fy) ‘near to, ou; e.g. ATg-aq, ‘to approach ;’ sriq-qr or fy-gr ‘to put on, to shut.’ ; HART ‘towards, to, upon; e.g. SyfH-H ‘ to go towards or to Afa-gq “to fall upon.’ AF (sometimes 7) ‘away, off, down; e.g. HT-=23g (§ 38, a) “to cut off y Ag-g ‘to descend ; syg-mrE or g-arE ‘to plunge down into.’ AT ‘towards, to, at’ c.g. w= ‘to draw towards, to attract; r= Fea ‘to shout at.’ Ig ‘up, ou, out’ e.g. IZ-z ‘to go up; to rise; I-A ‘lo pour out.’ 212 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ §487T— gq ‘near to, under; e.g. IT-TH ‘to go near to; gg-eyT ‘to stand near or under.’ fa ‘down, into; e.g. f-ag (§ 41, a) ‘to sit down; aug ‘to hold down, to suppress ; fr-fr (§ 41, a) “to pour into.’ 1+: ‘out of, forth from; e.g. fag “to go os fag (§ 37, mote) ‘to spring from, qin ‘away, back; e.g. gq ‘to turn away or back.’ qf ‘round, A e.g. qi¥-z ‘to go round; qiy-ofy (§ 40, a) ¢ to lead round ;’ qq to roam about.’ g ‘forth, forward, pro-; e.g. g-sey ‘to step forth, to proceed ;’ g-gyr ‘to set out 3’ g-oray (§ 40, a) ‘to bend forward, to bow down before. ~~ aia ‘back, re-; e.g. afa-gq, ‘to repel;’ ata-ag ‘to respond.’ far ‘apart, dis-;’ e.g. fa=g ‘to take apart; Fo ‘to dispose.’ aq ‘together, con-;’ GT ‘to go together, to assemble; g-fy ‘to collect.’ (0) Two or more of the above prepositions may be combined ; e.g. agar (ie Gk Iq + 1)-TH ‘to come together near to, fagat (te. sty + gH + n)-7H ‘ to approach together; &ec. § 487. (a) The initial g of the roots gr ‘to stand’ and wy ‘to support’ is dropped when it is immediately preceded by the preposition 3; &-9- Periph. Fut. of geyr with I, IAAT; but Pres. Ind. Par. 3x- arr; ; Perf. Par. gmeely ; Aor. Par. Ig. (6) The sibilant g (changeable to i by § 41, a) is prefixed to the rt. ‘to do,’ after the preposition gy, and after the prepositions gq and qfY in the sense of ‘to decorate, ornament,’ &c.; likewise to the rt. & ‘to scatter’ after the prepositions gq and gfg, in the sense of ‘to cut, to hurt ;’ (see §§ 229 d, 231 d). § 488. The following words are prefixed to certain roots only, and they share in the peculiarities of prepositions (§§ 229, 230, and 513) when they are so prefixed: — 1. sys is prefixed to gz and to roots which mean ‘to go; e.g. w=, ‘to go towards,’ Gerund ATTA Or AJPH; ATS sto salute,” Gerund s{=ZYar. 2. sreqy is prefixed to g, 71%, |, 3, and similar roots ; e.g. HEAL or sFgL-mH ‘to go between, to Sisppenny FAT-AT ‘to conceal 3’ HAL ‘ to be within ;’ Gerund S=qRE, FA=JAFT OF y=qaA Lc. 3. ARH, A, AFA» FI, @rg and certain other words which are imitative of sound, are prefixed to rt. &; e.g. qAS-F ‘to decorate; Gq-&H ‘to treat with respect,’ sy@{-; ‘to treat with disrespect; F{-H § 489.] PREPOSITIONS AND OTHER VERBAL PREFIXES, 213 “to promise; @ra-F ¢ to make the sound which is produced in clearing one’s throat; Gerund sigz®, TET &e. 4. sym is prefixed to g, ray 7, «fT, and similar roots; e.g. WHT “to go down, to set;’ s&i-et ‘to lead down, to cause to set; Gerund wafaa &e. 5. arte: and qIg: are prefixed to &, 1d, iq &e. ; eg. ANAT-F (§ 37, note) ‘to make manifest ; AFL, ‘to become manifest; Gerund eqrfa- HT, mgHA. See 8. ; 6. fag: is prefixed to 3g, wr &c., and optionally to &, when it denotes disappearance ; e.g. fqQi-3y ‘to disappear, Gerund fa{rg®; RATE-F (§ 37, note) or {JT:~, or, in two separate unconnected words, fg: H ‘to cover, to conceal,” Gerund faa, or uF, or fT: FeAl. "> 7. gy: is prefixed to, i, way, &c.; e.g. grg-z (§ 37, note) ‘to place before,” Gerund grea; qU-TH ‘to go before,” Gerund ITE or qT. 8. qrerta, fae, CET arg:, AA, and certain other words may optionally be prefixed to the root g or remain separate; e.g. F3r-% or ar F ‘to subdue,” Gerund FAFA or FIX FAT. § 489. (a) Nouns substantive and adjective may be prefixed to the roots g ‘to make,” srg ‘to be,” and 3 ‘to become,” to express the meaning that somebody makes a person or thing, or that a person or thing becomes, that which is denoted by the noun prefixed to F, ug, or 3; e.g. FaNi-% ‘to make (that which is not black) black, FI ‘to become black,’ TFT ‘to become the Ganges.” The roots F, 94, and 3 are in this connection treated as they are treated when preposi- tions are prefixed to them ; e.g. Gerund of Huft-g, FOF. (0) The final letters of nouns which are so prefixed to %, 917, and Jq, undergo the following changes: 1. 3 and 37 are changed to , except when final in indeclinables ; g and g are lengthened ; and sg is changed to §; e.g. Fotr-37 (from Far and 37), AFt-3 (from argr and 37); gyfi-37 (from grfyy and iq), TE] (from 37% and 37); fq=fi-3y (from {Yq and 37). But gI-3 (from the indecl. grat and 37) ‘to become evening.’ 2. A final q is dropped, and afterwards the preceding rule is applied to the penultimate vowel; e.g. TSH (from TAT and q) ‘to become a king ;’ wfi-F (from wwe and 3) ‘to reduce to ashes,’ 3. Nouns with two bases assume their weak base, nouns with three bases their middle base ; their finals are first changed as in the Loc. Plur., and afterwards the Sandhi-rules in § 26, ff., are applicable; e.g. fadg-3 (from fF and ) ‘to put aside. 214 ; SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 490- § 490. To express the sense that a person or thing becomes com- pletely, or that somebody changes a person or thing altogether to, that which is denoted by a certain noun, the suffix gq (the initial g of which is never changed to q) may he added to that noun, and the roots g;, HH, or 37, or the root gg, with the preposition may, may be added to the derivative so formed; e.g. stfgrgrg or AmArdTg ‘to be changed completely to five, Jy@r@RF ‘to change completely to ashes.” Some- times the suffix gr conveys the notion that a person or thing becomes, or that somebody makes a person or thing, dependent on or the pro- perty of that which is denoted by a certain noun; eg. UIAATH ‘to become dependent on, or the property of, a king; yra@neg ‘to make (a person or thing) dependent on, or the property of, a king.’ The derivatives in grag which are formed in accordance with this rule remain independent words and do not share in the properties of prepositions; the Gerund of & after WEA 1s therefore FHegr (not FJ), AHHEAL CHAPTER IX. FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, § 491. There are a few verbal roots which, without undergoing any change, may be used also as nominal bases; e.g. the root gzx ‘to see’ may also be used as a feminine noun in the sense of ‘sight, or ‘an eye ; similarly gg asa verbal root means ¢ to rejoice,’ as a feminine noun ‘joy ;’ Fg as a verbal root ‘to fight,’ as a feminine noun ‘a fight, a bat- tle; farsr as a verbal root ‘to point out,’ as a feminine noun ‘a point of the compass.’ In the same way the verbal root Tz, when the preposition |AT 1s prefixed to it, means ‘to go to, to befall,” and HY as a feminine noun means ‘ what befalls a person, misfortune ;’ the root gg with the preposition ga prefixed to it means © to sit together,” the feminine noun dag ‘an assembly; the root ag with the prepositions gg and &r conveys the sense ¢ to bind on to,’ the word IqTAg as a feminine substan- tive means ‘a sandal, a shoe’ (that which is bound to the foot). § 492. (a) Nearly all roots may, without undergoing any change, be used as the last members of compound nouns, and when employed thus, they generally convey the sense of a Present Participle of the Active; e.g. THI ‘knowing the law, one who knows the law’ (from wg# and 94), ¥3frg knowing the Vedas, one who knows the Vedas’ (from Jz and fag ). § 495.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 215 (b) When a root that ends in a short vowel is used in this manner, the letter q is affixed to it; e.g. fasfsta © conquering all, one who conquers all’ (from fasy and fy); fusa making pictures, a painter’ (from fy and 5). But f3arqr © protecting all, one who protects all, (from fs and qr) &e. § 493. In general, however, nominal bases ate derived from verbal roots or derivative verbal bases by means of suffixes, and from the nominal bases so formed other nominal bases are derived by means of other suffixes ; or nominal bases are formed by composition. Nominal bases derived from roots or from other nominal bases by means of suffixes are called Derivative Nominal Bases; nominal bases formed by composition are called Compound Nominal Bases or Compounds. I.-DERIVATIVE NOMINAL BASES. § 494. The suffixes by which nominal bases are derived from roots or derivative verbal bases are called primary or krit suffixes, and the nominal bases formed by them primary nominal bases. Those suffixes by which nominal bases are derived from other nominal bases are called secondary or taddhita suffixes, and the nominal bases formed by them secondary nominal bases. Z.g. the bases &g ‘a doer, ff ‘intelli- gence,’ FIAT ‘one who causes to know,” are primary nominal bases, the first derived by the primary or krit suffix g from rt. & ‘to do, the second derived by the krit suffix {fg from the root Aq ‘to think,” and the third derived by the krit suffix g from the causal base gifs ‘to cause to know’ (of rt. g¥)- Dut the bases FEA ‘the state of a doer,’ AAT ‘possessed of intelligence,” sygaar ¢ childlessness,’ are secondary nominal bases, derived, the first by the secondary or taddhita sufix gg from the primary nominal hase FF “a doer,” the second by the taddhita suffix gg from the primary nominal base ff ¢ intelligence,” and the third by the taddhita suffix gr from the compound nominal base syga ‘childless.’ § 495. There is a peculiar class of primary or krit suffixes to which the native grammarians have applied the technical denomination of unadi-suffixes, i.e. a list of suflixes headed by the suffix guy (or § with the mute or indicatory letter up attached to it). They form, like other krit suffixes, primary nouns from verbal roots, but are given in special lists because their application is rare, and because either the nouns derived by them are formed very irregularly, or the connection between the meanings of the nouns derived by them and the roots from which they are supposed to have been derived is not so clearly discernible as it is in the case of other primary nouns. Instances of nouns formed hy 216 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 496— means of Unadi-suffixes are sar ‘a horse,” from sq3r ‘to pervade,’ Ig ‘a camel,’ derived from gg ‘to burn, &e. § 496. The rules of Sandhi which apply to the final letters of roots or derivative verbal bases and the initial letters of primary or krit suffixes are generally those stated in § 44, ff, and § 309, ff. The same rules apply also to the final letters of nominal bases and initial vowels or initial 7 of secondary or taddhita suffixes. Before taddhita suffixes which begin with any other consonant than % nominal bases that end in consonants must first undergo the same changes which they undergo in their Loc. Plur., afterwards the rules given in § 26, ff. are applied; there are, however, exceptions. § 497. The only primary nouns the formation of which will be fully taught here, are the Participles, the Gerund, the Infinitive, and the Verbal Adjectives. In § 539 the student will find a list of other common Primary or Krit suffixes, and in § 540 alist of the most common Secondary or Taddhita suffixes. : 1.—PARTICIPLES. (a)—Participles of the Present tense. § 498. (a) The Participle of the Present Parasmai. is formed by the addition of the suffix w1q to the special base of the Pres. Par.; when the special base is changeable, sq is added to the special weak base. The base undergoes before 31g the same changes which it undergoes before the termination {Fg or fy of the 3 Plur, Pres, Ind. Par. Z. g. rt. ¥ cl. 1. Sp. B. Wa} 3 PL Pres. Ward; Pte. WAT, “being. re. RY 4, gay, gsAleay, Aq, playing. HET 6 oo TT0 6 TBRRY 0 GF Striking rt. BY 2.8p. W.B.fgw; |, fafa; , fF hating meg 2... oi. T0 S19. ‘ging nem me co owlas ma heyy mE 5. FE» Jala; » JG ‘sacrificing.’ ead 5, Ha» grafea » GAT ‘squeezing out.’ § 499.1 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 217 rt. ATF 5. Sp. W.B.8TTg; 3 PL. Pr. SATga{ea; Pte. ATIF obtaining.’ ~N No Do ND wt. TL 7. » Begs ” Teed; » GEE ‘obstructing.’ ye, GLI, am; » aFaled; , ara ‘stretching.’ rt. 9. IU; HIOed; , SIO buying. 1. gL 10. SpB. ATW; , ARACEAE ‘stealing. th. Fg ;Caus.,, AGA; , ANgElRd; , AIA, ‘causing to know.’ Des, Fa Wy Fal vied, FATT ‘wishing to know.’ (0) The declension and the formation of the feminine base of this participle have been treated of in § 101, ff, (c) ag cl. 2. “to know,’ forms its Pres. Partic, Par. either regularly agg, or it forms by means of the suffix of the Partic. of the Red. Perf. Par. fagq, declined § 124. (See § 279). § 499. («) The Participle of the Present Atmane. is formed by the addition of the suffix yea ( changeable to gor by § 58, Fem. gray or Aor) to the special base of the Present ; but when the special base is changeable, sqrr (instead of grey) is added to the special weak base. Final 31 of the special base remains unchanged before gray; before spray the base undergoes the same changes which it undergoes before the ter- mination fg of the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Atm. Z. g. rt. q ch. 1; Spee. B. ‘um ; Partic. WIHT, wide), dem, fEEwm, nEgg de’, , HG o dA. rt. fg cl. 2. Sp. W.B. fg; 8 PL. Pres. fg; Poe. fam, wg od .. §E . gey; , FEM ol. @ uielig, ol wy, g7; " grad; , gear, ito ol 5, ary; WATgAR; , SIGE. 28 218 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. : [§ 500— it. ®9 cl. 7.8p.W.B. &=q; 3 PLPres. Td y Pre. ITA. ham e.8 1, ag 4 qe » GFA, oA clo, Af; , Aww, owe. rt. EY with prep. ATS 3 PL.Pres. A. 3trra(§283;) Pte. SATHTH, rt. GT cl.10.Spec.B. ACA Partie, STITT, it, Jy Cavs. , , AYIA a ATTATT. Des. B. gate FATA. (0) This participle is declined according to § 131. (¢) wre cl. 2. ‘to sit,’ forms its Pres. Partie. Atm. irregularly syrefra ¢ sitting.’ § 500. (a) The Participle of the Present Passive is formed by the addition of the suffix {gra (changeable to for by § 58) to the Passive base in 3. X.g. rt. TE 3 Pass. B. qa; Pte, TAT ‘who or what is struck. rh. f= 5 RIE . IAT ¢ who or what is gathered.’ rt. 373 5 qe, FAIATN ‘who or what is heard.’ © o ? o rt. 3 3 tra , THRIFT © who or what is done. rt. qT} gi; , TAA “who or what is given.’ wo nO . 3 rt. FTcl.10. 5 qr HIATT © who or what is stolen. ~ ~ . rt. J 3Caus. Pass AT; ,, AAAI “ who or what is caused to know. Des. Pass. gatfrsT > Ta TISTHTIT “who or what is desired to know.’ (bh) This participle also is declined according to § 131. (b)— Participles of the Simple Future. § 501. (a) The Participle of the Simple Future in Parasmai, 18 ned by the addition of the suffix srg to the base of the Simple Fat. Par. in @F or tx; the participle of the Simple Future in Atmane, and in Passive by the addition of the suffix {rq to the base of the Simple Fut. Atm. and Pass. in gg or ex, Before rq. the final 3 of the Future base is dropped, before @rq the base remains unchanged. Z.g. § 502.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES: '_ .. #219 mn Base of the Simple Fut. Future Partic. rt, gr; in Par. a Par. grag ) ‘one who will Atm, qT; Atm, zream § igive, WD TY or Pass. grea or ! ‘who or what 3» ass, TNA; » ETCASTHTOT will be given.’ rt. 3g; in Par. and - Par, wiasaq } ¢ who or what Atm, } whe Atm, srRegaio { will he! 1 Puss. { wiaey or Pass. wiEeamor or ! wrfasg; , wifasaEm rt. geg;in Par. Atm, Hy Par. FITTAT ¢ who or what and Pass. } J Atm. STASI HTT ! will know.? 2 ‘who or what Pass. aifarearamon yo be known.’ : .in Par ar. ivf ‘who or what re, gn op me } Siti; = hs } ay : . TAHT Frrex or Pass. Jrefyegamor or) ¢ who or what [fed . MfRsgar JS will be stolen.’ : (b) For the declension and the formation of the feminine hase of these participles see § 101 and § 131. (c)—Participles of the Perfect. 502. (a) The Participle of the Reduplicated Perfect Parasmai. is formed with the suffix gg which is generally added to the weak base of ‘the Red. Perfect. When the weak base consists of only one syllable, g& is added with the intermediate g; and it may be added with or without g after the roots Hq ‘to go,’ gq ‘to strike,” zx ‘to see,’ {33x ¢ to enter,’ and fag cl. 6 ‘to find.’ Of the five roots mentioned in § 316, gg forms this participle from the weak base (with g), and sq and gs form it from the strong base with penultimate (short) st (without g), while srg and TF may form it in either way. £.g. rt. fag Red. W. B. {= Pte. fErfEE: who or what split.’ nN» svar cin Pag, rt. JT 3 b daz ., 9339 who or what struck. rt, faa; p EEE frfFas who or what played.” § 309,a) 1 ws . fad 3 4 feria who or what led.’ rt. &F 3 x qe a gag ‘who or what praised’ rt. F 3 » 9% » AHA «who or what did.’ rt. AH ¢ % AH; » Aq THEE “who or what threw.’ 220 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, rt. §93 Red. W.B.§93 Pte. rt. qT 4 rt. JH 3 rt. 993 rt. i rb. I 3 But rt. @ 3 rt, 3 rt. &¥§ it. Tq 2» Zs Steg 3 2 age P93 on ¥5r [§ 508— en . EIMIH_ “who or what wished. giyaq who or what gave.’ Sra ¢ who or what ate.’ qfaae who or what cooked.’ SARCIC who or what spoke.’ fag who or what sacrificed.’ AGTH “who or what dug’ SEAT or SAG (§ 309, b) “who or what went.’ SIEEE or STH ¢ who or what struck.’ TERE or ¥e dq q ‘who or what saw. (6) The declension and the formation of the feminine base of this: participle have been treated of in § § 122-125. § 503. (a) The Participle of the Red. Perfect Atmane. is formed with the suffix sqrsy (changeable to stro, Fem. strat or =o) which is generally added to the weak base of the Red. Perfect; final letters of the base generally undergo before girs the same changes which they undergo before the termination 2X of the 3 Plur, Atm. Z.g. NOS rt. fg 3 Red. W. B. fag 3 8. PL A. fafaigT rt. HT 3 sf rt. HK 3 rt. qT 3 rt. a5 (6) For the declension 2) 2» » ~ fades 2 4d ¢q 8 6 © ~~ » » A 24 ~~ 5 A © ~~ 2» f this participle see § 131. Pte. fara. fetears. qa, TERI, CEC THA, § 504. (a) Roots ending in sg (including the roots i and § in § 318) form their Perfect Participles, contrary to the general rule, thus: a4 is added to the root, which then is changed in accordance with the § 506.] FORMATION OE NOMINAL BASES. 221 rules of Sandhi (§ 48), and is finally reduplicated ; in the case of yr, on the other hand, the root is first reduplicated, and sys afterwards added to the reduplicated form changed according to the rules of Sandhi. E.g. rt. 7; Pte. Par. Rae; Pte. (Atm. FETT.) € rt. gq 3 Litay 3 dag 30.» rao. rt. 3 3 39 Riad; 2 ( ” FITRTTIOT.) it. 373g TRY qT. Some grammarians, however, form fafggior and go in Atm, 2 and of 3 9, and 7 (§ 307, d) some form gTaq, IAF, and FFI in Par. The root 5 with ay forms g=rmay and gewor. The root RS (§ 322, c) similarly forms ATT. Of Jag some form SIT, others ARTI. (0) Roots which drop their penultimate nasal in other forms (see § 381, b, 1) drop it also in these participles; e.g. sg forms (not syrq= - Fg , but) syria (as if from 3s.) od § 505. The Participles of the Periphrastic Perfect in Parasmai. and Atmane. are formed by the addition of the Participles of the Redupl. Perf, of the auxiliary verbs g, stg or 3, to the base in ra, Eg. 16.97 § Pic. P. STGIAFIAM_ or IFAANGAT_ or STA. rh. ATE, A. SATGEHOT or ATATATATE_ or ARTI. gry, PARA or ACATAGIH or TEATTIAG, , A, SNTATTH or FAATANEAG or FTAA, (d)—Zhe Past Participles. § 506. (a) The Past Passive Participle is formed by the addition to the root or to the derivative verbal base of the suffix g (Fem. base ar); sometimes ( § 508 ) this suffix q is changed to i (changeable to of by § 58, Fem, base qr or arr). £.g. rt, ¥T ‘to bathe; Past Pass. Pte. ®TT bathed.’ rt, BF “to gather; , 4 “ faa ‘gathered.’ 08] lodd nw ee FE Sed) rb. EJ to praise; # 5 Ed praised.’ 9 rt} “to become; ,, 5 a ‘become.’ 1S 2 3 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 507— rt. & ‘todo; Past. Pass Pic. FF ‘done. rt. A ‘to loosen; wa STR floogened) NN 2 Caus. B. TT (of rt, 9 % 3 FIT ‘made toknow.’ DN oS oe Des. BL. aE (of rt. F)s wept TRY “desired to do.” [oY > s J But. ® ‘to. sealer? ., wi BI ‘scattered. vy faz bosplibe sh, vn Cn qe split.’ (6) For the declension of this participle see § 131. § 507. (wx) The suffix g is added to many roots without the interme- diate g, to many other roots with the intermediate % and to a few roots it may be added with or without the intermediate z. In general, q is added without g to all roots ending in vowels, and to those monosyllabic roots ending in consonants to which any other suffix (beginning with a consonant, except 7) must or may be added without F; e.g. vt. For (set) ‘to go; Past Pass. Pte. (31a ‘gone.’ rt. = (anit) ‘to sprinkle; Sige ‘sprinkled.’ HARE (anat) “to join; piel ‘joined.’ rt. IE (opt-anit) ‘to covers or iit ao] ‘covered.’ tt. FE (set, but see§370d) ‘to grow; (b) & is added without g also to ge, eT, =, IT, Fa cl 1, 79, IT JI, AG, AY, AT, 4, fast and some other less common roots ; e.g. rt, 79 ‘to kindle’; Past Pass. Pte. Fg ‘kindled’ rt. ELE “to shine’; oo 2 i hap shining. (¢) may optionally be added with or without intermediate g to vt. fggzr, P. P. Pte. {gw or {iar ‘afflicted rt. agg, P. P. Pte. saRa or quot (§ 508) ¢ swift ;’ rt. gq, cl, 1, P. P, Pte. qfge or gq ‘ purified ; and to certain other roots provided the Past Pass. Pte. is used impersonally or conveys the sense of beginning to perform the action or to undergo the state which is expressed by the root; e.g. rt. aT forms fagfea (or &Za) or {eg=r in the sense of ‘beginning to perspire,” or when the Partic. is used impersonally ( aTeaaas or Rama ‘he has perspired’). (4) To all other roots, and to all derivative verbal bases except those which already end in g, g wust be added with intermediate g;like- HWA ‘ grown.’ 9 23 a § 508.] FORMATION OI NOMINAL BASES, ye (against the general rule under a) to gq ‘to he hungry’ AP. DP. 7), TF to seize, qa ‘to fall’ (qigq), ag ‘to dwell’ (3fyq), > t to lie down’ (zr), &e. After Og the intermediate g wust be lengthened (P. P. Pte. gia). Z£.g. rt. Tg “to suspect ; Past Pass, Pte. TEA ‘suspected. rb. fez ‘to blame; , , , [Faq ‘blamed’ rt. FL “to steal; Deriv. Base Ty Past. P. Pte. STA ‘stolen.’ rt. I “to know 7 Caus. Base afer Past. P. Pte. of Caus. SUHa ‘made to know.’ Desid. Base FAIRS) P. L. Pte. of Desid. FACING (§ 456) “desired to know.’ on Atm, Freq. Base qT P. P. Ptc. of Freq. qr, tH abe, » SE... SORE G4) 2) 3 (¢) When g is added without intermediate g to roots ending in consonants, the rules given in § 309 ff. must be observed ; e.g. rt. aA “to abandon ; Past Pass. Pte. JdW® ‘abandoned. rt, GS ‘to emit 2 " sn TIE ‘emitied. rt. HH ‘to obtain; 5 5 , sq ‘obtained.’ rb. ™ ‘to wish; “ “ » 1 BE atwished. rt. §§ ‘to burn; at am omy. ET bhumt’ rt. f&g “to lick; Lie ingen atalE ilicked.? rt. Hg ‘to faint; 5 3 » Hor aT “faint. tt. Eg ‘to bind; . a ,; Toi hound,’ 2 N J it. qg_ ‘to bear; tt Es «1 I *horne., § 508, (a) Wherever the suflix § (without intermediate g) would immediately follow upon one of the consonants gory, it must be changed to 1. This = is substituted for g also after those roots ending in ry (uw, @, and 3, § 297, b) which begin with a conjunct consonant and contain a semivowel ; and also after certain other roots such as gr ‘to go,” gr ‘to abandon,” fa ‘to grow,’ 2‘ tofly,’ gt ‘to perish, & ‘to adhere, g ‘to cut,’ 224 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [5 500— zy ‘to tear,” wg ‘to break, gL, ‘to bend,” (not ‘to enjoy,’), qs ~ ~ “to dive,” I ‘to break,’ fg ‘to tremble’ etc. Before a, final & is changed to 7, and final 5 and ssf are changed to a1. Z.g. rt. F ‘to scatter; (§48) Past Pass. Pte. FHT “scattered. rt. aq ‘to strike? (§ 309,0) , . qm ‘struck’ (see $ 507, 0). rt. fag to split; nin ATT Split) 33 to fades J biglo see § TEIR Caded, rt. BF | ‘lo go; » HpnteL BT ‘gone.’ rt. 81 “to abandon; SE % BG ‘abandoned.’ rt. @ ‘to cub? Ye 5 SN ‘cut. yh. qT ‘to bend; ne . aq ‘bent; (but q& ‘enjoyed’. rt. HH ‘to dive; oy , HH ‘immerged. rt. HE ‘to sity a. a ow BY (with prep fs {007 ete.) (0) The following are common cxceptions to this rule: rt. Ag ‘to become intoxicated, P. P. Ptc. gw ‘intoxicated; rt. &xr to name,’ era ‘named, known; €3 ‘to think,’ eqrg ‘thought’; & forms iq and & ga by § 509, a. (c) Some roots optionally change gq to & ; rt. g=g ‘to moisten,’ P. P. Pte. IT Or IN ‘moistened ; rt. qT ‘to strike,’ ga or ga ‘gtruck 7? rt. 1 “to smell,’ grag or gor ‘smelt; rt. §F ‘to protect,” grey or ror ‘ pro- tected; rt. Ft ‘to be ashamed,’ gig or For ‘ashamed.’ Rt. fg ‘to play’ generally forms grag ‘played,’ but when it means ‘to gamble,’ it forms a. Rt. fag ‘to know’ forms ffgg ‘known rt. fag ‘to find,’ fas or fam, &c. § 509. Before the suffix (g or 7) of the Past Passive Participle roots undergo the following changes :(— (#) The roots mentioned in § 381 4, 6, (except g) are changed as they are changed in the Benedictive Par. ; e.g. § 509.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 225 rt. FF ‘to speak; Past Pass. Pte. g® ‘spoken.’ . rh FY ‘to say; 5 3fEa ‘said. rt. qg_ “folcarry’ 1, , Fe ‘carried. rt. Iq “to sacrifice; ,, ” 5 gg ‘sacrificed.’ rt. Sq ‘to pierce; | 3 2 fag pierced. rt. gg ‘to ask; i 3 ky gy ‘asked. rt. SE ‘to tear; i i FFT ‘torn.’ rt. g ‘to call; 3 3 EX ‘called’ rb. BF ‘to grow? 4 JA ‘grown. rt. FT ‘to decay; v L Sq ‘decayed. rt. FAG ‘to mle 5 reg ‘ruled’ (0) A penultimate radical nasal is generally dropped (see § 381 t 3 1) e0. rt. FG ‘to bind; Past Pass. Pte. dg ‘bound.’ rt. gar “to bite; 4, 1] p: Tg ‘bitten. rt. TFL ‘to tle? HE TET “tied. rt. WH ‘to break; |, i 4 Hq ‘broken.’ But rt. fez to blame; ,, 3 ” fafeaa ‘blamed.’ (c) The penultimate vowel of roots that end in a nasal is generally lengthened before g (without the intermediate g); e.g. rt. HH ‘to step; Past Pass. Pte. leq ‘stepped’ (§309, b). rt. JAH to grow calm; ,, ol ATA ‘calm.’ (d) But the roots TH ‘to go,’ qq ‘to bend,” 73g ‘to restrain,’ TH ‘to sport,’ qq ‘to think,’ gq ‘to kill, Tq cl. 1, ‘to serve,” and all roots of the 8th (tanddi) class that end in a nasal, drop their final nasal before as eg. rt. TH ‘to go; Past Pass, Pte. Wd ‘gone’ vt. EX “tosirike’ 0 » Eq ‘struck’ rt. O° flo stretch; ,, +». qf *stretched, 29s 226 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§510— (¢) And the roots ga ‘to dig,” sr ‘to be born,” and gg ‘to obtain,’ drop their final i and lengthen their vowel before g (see § 385, 2); e.g, rt. @Y ‘to dig; Past Pass. Pte. ra ‘dug. (f) A final radical 7 is changed to % before § (without intermediate g) and 7; but when preceded by , it is dropped (§ 309, a); e.g. rt. faa ‘ to sew; Past Pass, Pte. aq ‘sewn. rt, ny top? ; 5 vs 9 or gs (§ 508, 0). rt, G3 tostrike’, . aor (§ 46) ‘struck’ oN a (9) Roots of the 1st (bhvddi) class with penultimate g may optionally substitute Guna for their radical vowel before the suffix g (when added with intermediate g), provided the Past Pass. Pte. is used impersonally or conveys the sense of ‘beginning’ to perform the action or to undergo the state expressed by the root; e.g. rt. gg ‘to delight’ forms usually gia ‘delighted; but in the sense of ‘beginning to delight,’ or when the Past Pass. Pte. is used impersonally, it forms gig or #ifza. In a few other roots, such as fige cl. 1, to which the suffix of the Past Pass. Pte. may under certain conditions (§ 507, c) optionally be added with the in- termediate g, Guna must be substituted for the radical vowel, when gis added with g; e.g. @fZq or {&ar; but of rt. fag cl. 4, f&fRa or faa. § 510. The following roots form their Past Passive Partic. irregularly: - (2)&T ‘to cut; Past. Pass, Pie, EG] ‘ent. HT ‘to place; h pie, ga ‘placed.’ HT “to measure; o 2» H ‘to barter; |r “to finish; Ly ¢ ’¢ rar] 3 + , THT ‘measured, ‘bartered. 5 3 » 8a finished.’ IT“ to stand; J AS Ie tdanding IF ‘to sing; b Ma ‘sung.’ qd ‘to suck; : .) id ‘sucked. 97 ‘io drink; 2 : :, 9 ‘drunk.’ BT “to split; . 5 om ofiw eh EN ‘to sharpen; , 3 ” Md or fara ‘sharpened.’ § 511.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 227 FT “to weave; Past Pass. Pte. 8q ‘woven.’ STI “to wake; a , STE ‘awake. FRET to be poor; » » 2» giifya ‘poor.’ (0) The roots gr ‘to give,” and g ‘ to protect,’ form in the Past Pass. Pte. gr given,’ ‘ protected; this participle may drop its initial g, when a preposition that ends in a vowel is prefixed to it; e.g. gg or gy; when z has thus been dropped, a preceding g or 3 is lengthened; c.g. fags or His. (c) Alphabetical list of some other roots which form their Past Pass. Pte. irregularly:— rh. AY ‘to eat; Past Pass. Pte. SI ‘eaten; (AA n, food’), rt. AF “to protect; sn =H ‘protected. rt. 21 ‘to destroy; iti faa or SAL ‘destroyed.’ SE to bei; ,, , , SIO ill’ (as with fever). rt. ET ‘to cleanse; a ra ‘cleansed.’ rt. qT ‘to grow; i” as qr or gid ‘grown.’ rt. ag ‘to faint; 5 2 aq or afga ‘fainting.’ ZITA ‘contracted.’ rt. Fol 2 aE, Fra ‘coagulated.’ Ge ‘cold,’ rt. ¥T “to cook; She FTO or 2IT ¢ cooked.’ rt. ERI to grow; 5 Rl RIT ‘grown.’ rt. AEN ‘to delight; ,, Vaal gd ‘delighted. § 511, A few roots cannot form the Past Pass. Pte. in g or aj its meaning, however, is expressed by certain adjectives derived from the roots; e.g. rt. ar ‘to waste,’ err ‘wasted; rt. qf ‘to cook,” gs ‘cooked, ripe; rt. Fg ‘to become dry, zges ‘dry; rt. FHF ‘to emaciate, FHA ‘emaciated’ (but e.g. with prep. oI, HHA); rt. HF ‘to burst open,’ FF ‘blown’ (but e.g, with prep. 7, TEA or AFF); de. 228 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 512— § 512. (a) A Past Active Ptc. is derived from the Past Pass, Pte. in g (or |) by the addition of the suftix gq; e.g. rt. ®T ‘to bathe; P. P. Pte. ®Td3 P. Act. P. WIAA ‘one who has bathed.’ rt, FF ‘to do » HT; » HAITI ‘one who has done.’ Th Tg “to spliey. 0, fare i} {ATT ‘one who has split. (6) For the declension and the formation of the feminine base of this participle see § 111 ff. : 2.—THE GERUND. § 513. (a) The Gerund is generally formed either by the addition of the suffix eg, or by the addition of the suffix 77, to the root or derivative verbal base. The suffix 37 is added to roots or derivative verbal bases to which no preposition (nor any of the words mentioned in §§ 488, 489) is prefixed; 37 is added to roots or derivative verbal bases to which a pre- position (or one of the words mentioned in §§ 488, 489) is prefixed. Z.g. rt. | ‘to lead; Ger. ¥icaT ‘having led. rt. JL cl. 10 ‘to steal; Deriv. Base fis Ger. =NTFIAT ‘hav- ing stolen.’ rt. J ‘to know; Caus. B. firs Ger. of Caus. araraeaT ‘having caused to know.’ Ger. of rt. ST with prep. 3, faa ‘having trained.’ Ger. of Caus. of rt. Tq with prep. q, TTT ‘having informed.’ (0) The negative a ‘not’ may be prefixed to either form of the Gerund; e.g. oF + HEr = STHTeAT ‘nob having led.’ 3 + FTTCAAT = JAAITIAT ‘not having stolen. of + Pera = sf of + TATET = SATE. («)—Formation of the Gerund by means of the suffix @t. § 514. The suffix &g7 is added to many roots without intermediate g; to some roots it may optionally be added with or without intermediate g; to other roots and to derivative verbal bases it is added with the jntermediate g. § 514.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 229 (@) ris added without intermediate g to roots ending in vowels (except far, €, ft, 7, and §), and to such anit roots (§ 298, a, 2) end- t s ing in consonants as are not specially mentioned under (0) and (c) below; e.g. rt. rt. rt. rt. ut, rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. ST 7 ~ 53 Hy 64 Yn m2 5 of (MN = “to know; ‘to conquer; ‘to join; ‘to become; ‘to do; ‘$0 cross; ‘to fill; “to protect; ‘to loosen; ‘to split; Ger. 2 ba] ) 23 ’ 2 2 » 2 2» Ser. fear. eT, er, FAT. dian (§ 48). qEET (§ 45). qT (§ 297, b). qa. fear. (b) er may optionally be added with or without intermediate g to the optionally-anit roots enumerated in § 298, b, 2 and 3 (except za), to (ge g=aia) ‘to wish,” Ry ‘to hurt,’ gg ‘to hurt,” gay ‘to desire,’ a ‘to bear,” gq ‘to purify,’ to many roots ending in 37 and &3g (viz. to @, aT, 7, FL, FR, FL; I, A, I, 04, ©, TH, A, TW), roots ending in gq, and to some other roots such as gq ‘to be,” ®|¥Y ‘to support,” gg ‘to fall,’ ag ‘to roam about,’ &c.; e.g. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. (c) egy must be added with intermediate g to SF ‘to anoint; Ger. 3% aq Eq gH qq bo wish i, ‘to stretch; ,, ‘to digy » 0 tame? ‘to be; ” ASAT Tiedt qietean gaan HE) Ffqear or Ie or ANT or HF. or qHl. or WIHT, or recAl. or THEN, gq ‘to be hungry,’ gq ‘to dwell,” to all roots that do not fall under (¢) and (b), and to derivative verbal bases; e.g. 230 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 515— - et ‘0 be hungry; Ger. ggieean or ZITAT, ‘to tear; , Seger, ‘to live; 2h SHEP Cavs. B.A, Arafat. Desid. B. gay, gaffer, i The intermediate g must be lengthened after the rt. ag ‘to seize’ (Ger. qygTear), and it may optionally be lengthened after rt. § ‘to 9 grow old’ ( Ger. {fiat or wife). § 515. When &g7is added to a root without intermediate g, final radical consonants combine with the inital q of &gr as they combine with the initial q of the suffix ( § 507, ¢); moreover the root is liable to all the changes described in § 509 (a)—(f). Z.g. rt. I ‘to speak; Ger. SEH. rt. IST ‘to sacrifice; 5 EL, rt. FF ‘to bind; aul. rb. JAH ‘to grow calm; , TFET (or FAT). hi 235 & cL / ~ rt. TH ‘to go; » VHT, rt. WA ‘to dig; , @rar (or @fwear), rt. Ta ‘to play; % gat (or gfe), § 516. When zg7 is added with intermediate g, the following rules ‘apply to the root : (¢) Guna is generally substituted for penultimate short vowels and for final vowels. Penultimate nasals are not dropped. Z.g. rt. TH ‘to wish; Ger. TINT (or TZ). i EC ‘to play; " gfe (or Em). rt. TA ‘to be; , afqer (orga). rt. AT “to lie down; RIE CI rt. 9 ‘to purify,’ , afar (ox gga), rt. ST ‘to grow old; SCAT or FLT. rb. WE ‘to fall; , &ra@r (or JE), (b) Guna may optionally be substituted for penultimate g and § of roots which begin with consonants and end in any consonant except g; § 518.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 231 likewise for the penultimate 3 of gq ‘ to thirst,’ gre ‘to bear,’ and gg ¢ to become emaciated ;’ ¢. g. : rh IT ‘to shine; Ger, fqean or Eifel. rt. FEE “to write ; , fetaear or fazar, rt. fT ‘to be moist; ,, FEHRAT or FEAT (or FEAT). rt. I ‘to thirsty , giver or afyer. (¢) Guna is (against « and b ) not substituted for the radical vowel of Fy ‘to extract,’ fF ‘to torment,’ Ixy ‘to put on’ (clothes), gg © to steal,” ggg ¢ to delight,” gg * to rub,’ § ‘to weep,’ fag ‘to know,’ wd of fast ‘to tremble,” and certain other roots. The roots ag ‘to seize,’ ag ‘to say,” and gg ‘ to dwell,’ are changed as in the Past Pass. Pte. Z.g J rt. faa ‘to torment; Ger. fe tarear (or Ew). rh. faz ‘to know; 3 fafeaar. rt. I§ ‘to say; . Iter. rt. TG ‘to dwell ; v Iyer, tt. AE ‘to seize; » TIAYeAI, (d) A penultimate nasal of roots ending in ef or gy, and the penulti- mate nasal of gg ‘ to roam about,” and gg ‘to tear out,” may ( against a) be dropped; e.g. rt. TFL ‘to tie; Ger. FTUAT or AHA, rt. I ‘to roam; , ater or afer (or I=). § 517. The final g of derivative verbal bases in g is gunated ; other derivative verbal bases undergo before the intermediate g of the Gerund the same changes which they undergo before the intermediate g of the Future, &c, £.g. rt. | cl. 10 ‘to steal; Deriv. Base ii Ger. =T(AaT, rt, IH ‘to knows Caus. Base CUEH , Arafat. Desid, Base gata; , Farfater, Atm. Freq. B. TIE 3 # qr fear. § 518. The following roots form their Gerund in egy irregularly: © The roots enumerated in § 510 (¢) and () are changed in the Gerund in zy as they are changed in the Past Pass. Pte.; e. g. 232 rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. rt. SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§519— rt. A “to cut; qr ‘to place; rt. ®T “to stand; rt. qT ‘to drink; - rt. 9 ‘to weave; eh XI ‘to give; J Past Pass. Pte. Fa Ger. xa. bp Aol TE®aide FEF, p LRA, 0 REE, bn SEN dr OE, oon XGeiii nr TEL i Ly ER Eiang) AERA, (0) Roots in 31 preceded by a nasal optionally retain that nasal even when gg is added without intermediate g; e.g. Th. HF ‘to break; rt, SS ‘to anoint; (c) Alphabetical list of some other roots that form their Gerund in a1 irregularly : ‘to eat; Ger. SITET, aE HH ig -~ qq - HS - qq -~ ‘to stride; ‘to hide; ‘to perish; ‘to dive; ‘to wipe; hq ‘to leap; "gg ‘to flow; = &T $519. ‘to abandon; 2» 22 2” po 2 2» 2 ER Ger. 5 or {eEhl. 5 AST or TEHT (or Hear). HEAT or Feel or FHIHeAT. JREEAT or TREAT (see § 403,8) or TT. SET (see §403,13) or AFT or ARIAT. US (see § 403,15) or HERAT. ATSEAT (see § 403,19) or FIT. heal. ®=3aT or Wiegaar, fears (but Ger. of &T “to go, EAT). (b)— Formation of the Gerund by means of the suffix q. («) The suffix 71 is added immediately to the root; e.g. ur + re ED Ger. ATF. fa + at Sf , (aera. ® +r. US , THI, fF + at fT , taEsa (§ 38, a). qq + rt, A 1 yum, § 522] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 233 (6) ris changed to gr when it is preceded by a short radical vowel. This rule applies even when the short radical vowel combines with the final vowel of a preceding preposition to a long vowel. Z.g. fa q q AT q + rt. 372 Ger. fats . ’ + rt. 3 » AEA. +, 2%, 553 » ABd. + rt. §3 i + rt. ! 9. § 520. The rules given in § 381 (b), 1, 4, 6, and 7, apply to the root also in the Gerund in a (but see § 523) ; e.g. + rt. TTS Ger. feiaeT, + tt. F} , SEH, o + rt. G3 , SH. + 1. FF3 T+ IF = WA. + 1.99; , ¥+ Iq = 0A, + rb. TE 3 , CE. + rh. WF, STLEHA. - + rt. &) . » SATE. +t. fm; WEE. § 521. Final radical gr remains unchanged (observe § 297, 0); the gand gof fy, df, and #yare changed to uy; and the § of &is optionally changed to a7 (compare § 403, 11). ZE.g. 377 qf Iq far + rt. XT} Ger. TZ. 5 5L a , area. + 1t. &3 » SIE, + rt. FN , (9&1 or (AST. § 522. (a) The roots ara ‘to go,” x, ‘to bend,’ 77 ‘to restrain,’ and TH ‘to sport’ may drop their final gg before 7 (which by § 519, 6, must be changed to gg when 37 is dropped); the roots of the Sth (fandds) class 30 8 234 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ §523— which end in a nasal (except gd), and the roots gg and #3 cl. 4, must drop their final nasal. Z.g. AT + rt. 4 Ger. THIF or AT, fa +E: Pye, q + rt. 4 » A8d. AT + rt. {135 » AIH. (b) The roots gg ‘to dig,’ §F ‘to beget,” and gs ‘to obtain’ option- ally drop their final 7 and lengthen their vowel when they do so; e.g. +t, gq, Ger. (q@=q or fA@F. § 523. Alphabetical list of other roots which form the Gerund in zg irregularly : rt. AF ‘to eat; Ger. SEY cg. ARATE, i faT ‘to destroy; : oifi 3 q409. rt. SIRE HITS » AHI, sor fags, watHa. rt. oF ‘to weave; rE, YE, vt. 3 ‘to cover; 8 STI} 5» S93. (with prep. qr, qT or are). rt. HT ‘to lie down; Ger. °_TA} eg. fase. § 624. (a) When the suffix 77 is added to derivative verbal bases of roots of the 10th (churddsi) class or to causal bases, the final g of these bases is dropped; but if the syllable which immediately precedes the final g of the base is prosodially short, the final g of the base is changed to 3 before 33. Z.g. rt. IL cl. 10; Deriv. Base =f Ger. o=qrar; e.g. a. vt. qa Cans. Base reir ” oFqreq 3 JETT, rt. #3 why WIRE, SRTSE WIE, rt. Fj oo, ig, emily Sums, § 526. ] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 235 But rt. 97 cl. 10; Deriv. Base for Ger. oA c.g. faraorz, rt, IH 3 Caus. Base. afi » OWES, AH, (6) The causal base sq1fy ( of rt. {rq * to obtain’ ) may either drop its final g or change it to 313 ; e.g. Ger. of the Causal of g + ATL, ATT or Iq. § 525. Desiderative bases drop their final 31 before T; Atm. Fre- quentative bases drop their final i when it is preceded by a consonant ; but when it is preceded by a vowel, they drop only their final sy. Z.g. rt. Fy Desid. Base FAMAT; Cer. TACT; c.g. ATA, A Ne a ba . 2 Atm. Freq. B. (gq; , o@ged; , gage. ~ - 0) ua ou SHE, RH, ndive, (¢)—The Gerund in YH. §526, (a) A third kind of Gerund may be formed by adding the suffix sry immediately to the root or the derivative verbal base, which before e13y generally undergo the same changes which they undergo before the final g of the 3 Sing. Aor. of the Passive ; e.g. rt. a 3 3 Sg. Aor. Pass, srafy; Ger. Eq ‘having split.’ rt. fy pili (8, % Ai » RAMEY ‘having gathered.’ xt, Zs SLE eins 5 AJ, QMEY ‘having cut.’ BERT, ATE; » AIH ‘having spoken.’ BBL ins Losin , HAIRY, SMH ‘having given.’ rt. I 33 Sg.Aor. Pass. f 5 rT, » TH } ‘having caused of the Causal ~~ ( HH, » TITHE to go. (b) This Gerund in egy occurs only rarely. It is mostly used re- peated, to denote reiteration or repetition of the action or state which is expressed by the verb; e.g. m&RH ‘having repeatedly remem- bered; qrgqiay baving drunk repeatedly.” It may also be employed after the adverbs «x, 939, JAA; ¢-9- oud WIS ASA ‘having first eaten, he goes.” Sometimes it is used as the last member of a compound in peculiar idiomatic constructions; e.g. TAFT a8 ‘he eats, doing (it) 256 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 527— thus’ i.e. < he eats thus; srrgroras Wisgfa ‘he feeds as many Brahmans as he knows; de. 3.—THE INFINITIVE. § 527. The Infinitive is formed by the suffix ga which is added to roots and to derivative verbal bases in the same manner in which the termination gr of the 3 Sing. of the Periph. Future Par. or Atm, is added to them ; e.g. rt. Ty Periph. Fut. QT; Infin. FIFA ‘to give. rt. tr a > Sars 2 Tq. ‘to conquer.’ rh. 3 3 ne REET, PER tele rb. Fy a a We rt. ove afm 0, alee) ‘to cross.’ or IL@L ,, F(A RHEE, TENET. AER “tose rh. a ie 5 rar or aH ‘to sing.’ rt. 99 § >» TERT} » THEY ‘to cook. wn 3ms 0 oamn eam or NET; ,, TTA, } Sig Pet, SETH. “to live 3 oy 5 =refaar a [Ia ‘to steal.’ [ 3 Periph Fut. of Causal. CAAT; Gi know. of Desid. gavfafar »” ga Tafa “to wish to know. of Atm.Frq. Sra 53 TF. ‘to know often. 4,— VERBAL ADJECTIVES. ‘to tear. § 528. (a) There are three common verbal adjectives which nay be formed from any root or derivative verbal base. One of them is formed by means of the suffix gap (muse. and neut; gaa fem. ), another by means of the suffix stsfrar ( masc. and newt.; JAAR fem. ), and the third by means of the suffix g ( masc. and newt.; Jt fem. ); e. g. § 530.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 237 rt. JY «to know; Tfasa or TAT or AMET “what must or ought to be known.’ rt. & ‘to do; F597 or FLOM or FTA “what must or ought to be done. (0) Tor the declension of these verbal adjectives see § 131. (a)—The Verbal Adjective in gsq. § 529. The suffix gar is added to roots and derivative bases in the same manner in which the suffix gH of the Infinitive is added to them; e.g. rt. 3 Inf. FTTH } Vb. Adj. FIAT ‘what must or ought to be given.’ rt. fs 95 ST 3 wn SATS “ss. isa spvicongueved. rt. us wd wfaga qiIa5T “what must or ought to be.’ 6. 93, AHA 4 » HIS4 ‘what must or ought to be loosened.’ rh Ly ,, AAG, AEE@SAC , ,, ,, stolen tt 3; + Caus.,, arafagy » afAT5T ‘what must or ought to be made to know. (0)—The Verbal Adjective in {ATT § 530. The vowels of primitive roots are before the suffix sreftay (changeable to stuf by § 58) liable to the same changes to which they are liable in the Simple or Periph. Future Par. or Atm.; penultimate =, however, is always changed to 3g ( not to g ); in FY it is changed to SIT. L.g. rt. Fy Vb. Adj. 1 4 HT — FIA “what must or ought to be given.’ o rt. a ” WT ART WRI, 0, sang) rt. ft ” Si) + HAA = ATA ss 3 conquered’ nd . Frigg, ed it. dA} 5 = + sift =wahg«,,,, ,, heard, “WT. BE TT FTC, dons 238 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 531— rt. 9 Vb. Adj. qT ‘what must or ought to be cooked.’ w. Brgy, Wg detainee S ~~ . rt. GSI3 ,, GEM Stim w ,» emitted. Th. fT 3 2» fag f 2» ’» 3 blamed.’ nn Ig 3 » EET (§ 403,8) ©, os 5 hidden, rt. HST 3 ATS (§403,19)¢ ,, “ ,» wiped. ( SAE or ; : | weet (§403,14)[ § 531. The final g of derivative bases of roots of the 10th (churddi) class and of Causal bases, and the final 31 of Desiderative bases are drop- vt. HH 4 i Ls fried.’ ~ “ - ped before s1sfter; the final 57 of Atmanepada Frequent. bases is drop- ped when their final 7 is preceded by a vowel ; but when it is preceded by a consonanat, the whole final 7 is dropped. Z.g. rt. FL Der. B. =f Vb, Adj. | ‘what must or ought to be stolen.’ vt. JH 3Caus.B. qf » AER eT ,» 10 be made to know. ,» Desid B. gaifdy ,, Fafawoftarc ,, | tobedesired to know.’ »s AFreq.B. Aiea; 5 TFT en ,, to be known frequently.’ rt. us ” CIE] 3» AAT rn ,» frequent- : ly to be. rt. Ts Caus, B. ris TIE ! to be made to give. (e)—The Verbal Adjective in 7, § 532. When the suffix 71 is added to roots ending in vowels, these vowels undergo the following changes: — (4) Final 311 (mw, T, and sy, § 297, 0) is changed to g; e.g. § 534.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 239 rt. Ty Verb. Adj. 3 ‘what must or ought to be given. - . rt. 3 sini AE ° # 5 » sucked’ 5 a < 2 PhS on on YT » 2 » » sung, hal rt. Hrs » w ERE fc mag ,» finished.’ (6) Final g and g are gunated; e.g. rt. it Verb. Adj. ST what must or ought to be conquered.’ vl. ry 3» 2» aq $ » 2» » » led’ (c) For final 3g and sg Vriddhi is substituted; e.g. rt. § Verb. Adj. gr ‘what must or ought to be seized. rt. TO » 2» SIE) : » » ”» » crossed.’ (@) =m is substituted for final g and 3; but when the verbal adjec- tive conveys the notion of necessity, the substitute for final g and 3 iss. £9 rt. §; Verb. Adj. 5X ‘what must or ought to be praised.’ o » ABT ‘what must necessarily be praised.’ rh. %3 » , @&8g ‘what must or ought to be cut. » » SBT ‘what must necessarily be cut.’ § 533. When 7 is added to roots with penultimate ( prosodially short ) g, §, *K, or &, the following rules apply : (a) Penultimate g, 3, and & are gunated; e.g. £N, rt. THE jVerb. Adj. AT “what must or ought to be split.’ rt. qq ’ 2 ” qreq : » » ” » known.’ NN . (0) Penultimate zg remains unchanged; e.g. rt. JF 3 Verb. Adj. FA ‘what must or ought to be destroyed. § 534. To roots with penultimate (prosodially short) =, 7 is added thus: (#) When the root with penultimate sr ends in a labial letter, sy remains unchanged; when the root ends in any other letter, st is lengthened. Z.g. 240 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. (§ 535— rt. A Verb. Adj. IIA ‘what must or ought to be cursed. Ege, 5 HAT Cy, ." Dome. aT: sy HWE Co, » + “yaad rt. ag; Sg vu. v » 5 anid) na: , , AEA 5 » spoken. (0) The = of the roots gq ‘to be ashamed,” gg ‘to speak, Fg ‘to speak,” gq ‘to sow,” and [3 ‘to sip’ is lengthened, although these roots end in labial letters; on the other hand, the 31 of 5g ‘to ask,’ 7 ¢ to beget,” gF ¢ to laugh,” &c., 7g ¢ to endeavour,’ zyx: ‘to be able, ng ‘to hurt,” and |g ‘to bear’ remains short, The =1 of Tg ‘to speak,’ and of some other roots is lengthened only when a preposition is prefixed to them, Z.g. rt. 9 3 Verb. Adj. ATA ‘what must or ought to be sown. rt. 9g: oy PBR J, ; » oporne. rh. Es 2 » TT ¢ » » » 2) spoken.’ ( But with prep. 5, saver. ) § 535. Prosodially long vowels of roots ending in consonants remain unchanged; e.g. rt. ok Adj. fa=aT ‘what must or ought to be blamed.’ ah » » ae t » » » 2) 3 honoured. NN rt. LL » 3 ey ¢ 3 2 IY) § 536. (a) Final =x and 1, of roots which show no intermediate z in the Past Pass. Ptc,, are changed to F and a1 respectively before the suffix 73 e.g. rt. fa; P.P Pio, fa, Vb. Adj. FT ‘what must or ought to be sprinkled. rt. 94 . 15 % gy. cooked.’ » bE rt, STF 3 ws SA 5 AFT ¢ ,, , anointed’ ee ~C e Butrt.dtsyy , SQ +9, (0) The finals of gs ‘to speak,’ rf, ‘to abandon,’ and FF ‘to sacrifice,” remain unchanged; likewise the final of I in gis and 2 i ,, bound. § 537.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 241 fAgtsy, that of yr in Weg when it means ¢ what must be eaten,’ and the final sf or 5 of any root when efgzer ¢ necessarily’ is prefixed to the Verbal Adjective ; e.g. rt. A} Verb. Adj. TTY ‘ what must or ought to be spoken. ER OT] $s ” i ,» abandoned. rh. I 3, SAATAIMH ‘what must necessarily be cooked. § 537. Alphabetical list of some roots which form the Verb, Adj, in 7 irregularly : rt. ‘to goy Verb. Adj. 2, rt. KF ‘to praise; 5 a =, i. F “todo; , , THor FHA. rt. ®L “to dig; Jn Sm UE cwolider 0, WE orflETL rt. FL ‘to go,” when without prepos., or with prepos. ¥T, o . ° o forms FH 3 otherwise °9TH} (srg ‘to be gone toy but SATATH ‘an instructor’). rt. JT ‘to be pleased; Verb. Ad). FH. rt. T&_ ‘to milk; ” » ZERO gel. rt. © ‘to respect; 5 ET, rt. ‘ to support; Verb. Adj. Hd} (with prep. €H, FAA or GAH), rt. IA “to wipe; il , HST or ATI, "9.9 “omix 3 , Jeg, rt. FH ‘to take, with prep. VI; ,, , SHEEN (otherwise FH), th... ioselent) a. , Jor a. S rt. TY ‘to rain; » AS or qu, als 242 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 538— rt. qq cto praise; Verb. Adj. 3T&® or I, xh. ATE ‘to rule; bs - 3reer, vt. @ ‘to press out; with prep. #3 y ATES (otherwise q=9 or vi, Bh fito praise] iy , qd. qr). vt, ER dostrike? oo, AT or ITH, § 538. When the suffixg is added to derivative verbal bases, the final letters of the bases undergo the same changes which they undergo before the suffix sate (§ 531); e.g. it. IL; Deriv. Base FMC; Verb, Adj. FORT 3 =r, NE » ~ * rt. J § Caus. Base WHE; » BENE; gig, w. gis dn mye ne Verdes oie, ~ el ~~ o.Q; th. FT § Deriv. Base Td} » y AAI; Bd. 5.—A List oF OTHER COMMON PRIMARY OR KRIT SUFFIXES. § 539. 1. s1 forms masculine (more rarely neuter) substantives which denote the action or state expressed by the verbal root; sometimes it is employed to form adjectives, or substantives denoting the agent, &c. The penultimate short or the final vowel of a root commonly takes its Guna or Vriddhi substitute; more rarely it remains unchanged; and sometimes the root is shortened before 31. The suffix is added both to roots without prefixes, and to roots combined with prepositions or other prefixes (§§488 and 489); sometimes the nominal base formed with it is used only in composition with other nouns or with certain prefixes. Z.g. gq m. ¢ conquering, victory’ ( rt. i ); ggF m. ‘vise’ (rt. g with prep. 37); Iq m. ‘instruction’ (rt. Fr with pr. gq); Fw m. ‘greed’ (rt. gq); Tar m. © disease’ ( rt. 1 ); srgw m. ‘regard’ (vt. z with pr. {qr ); oF m. ¢ preference’ ( rt. Hq, FEA, With pr. 7); HH m. ‘step’ (rt. H{Y); ag n. fear, danger’ ( vi, + ); &| ¢ patient’ (rt. yay ); FA Me ‘a ruler, lord’ (rt. 31); A Fig m. ‘a warrior’ (rt, gq )i— qr m. ‘ the act of cooking’ ( rt. =) quire me. ¢ salutation’ (vb. sg with pr. ); fare m. ¢ dejection’ ( rt. gg with pr. fa ); |r m. ‘being, becoming’ (rt. 37); frst m. ¢ the feroming mixed’ (frst § 489); egg m. ‘respectful treatment’ ( ga-z § 488, 3); stegry m. reading, study’ ( rt. g with pr. fer ); Iqregry m. © a teacher’ (rt, g with pr. gg and {YY );—IT » § 539.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 243 ‘knowing, intelligent’ (rt. ge ).—atfiyg ‘knowing’ (rt. gr with pr. ANT );—F FAH Mm. ‘a pot-maker, potter’ (rt. &); farwy m. ‘the light-maker’ i. e., the sun (rt. %); qayg m. ‘the water-giver,’ i. e, a cloud, (rt. gr); bx m. ‘a twice-born’ or ‘a bird’ (rt. §7 );—gHT ‘easy to be done’ (rt. F); goa ‘difficult to be obtained’ (rt. &3 ). 2. era (changeable to stor by § 58) mostly forms neuter substantives which denote the action or state expressed by the root or verbal base, the instrument or means by which that action or state is brought about, d&e.; but it also forms some feminine nouns (in sfqT, especially from roots of the churddi class or causal verbs), and masculine nouns. A penultimate short or a final vowel of the root is generally gunated. L. g. gs n. ‘going’ (rt. wy); FIA ne ‘speech’ (rt. g); ag 7. ‘the mouth, face’ (rt. qg ); req 0. ‘reading, study’ (rt, g with pr, MT); AFH 7 ‘going after’ (vt. | with pr. sig); aaa n. ‘eye’ (vt. ft); stgor ©. ‘ear’ (vb, 3); Ww ©. food’ (vt. gar); ATO n. ‘death’ (vt. 33); YH 7. ‘an ornament’ (rt. J); ATT 7. ‘a seat’ (rt. ATH); FIW 72. Or FIT 7. ‘a cause’ (rt. F); qrga 7. ‘a vehicle’ (rt. FF); FA 2. a gift? (vt. qT); ATEHTT 7. ‘a tale’ (vt. wgy with pr. sr); —wor=t f- ‘counting’ (rt. arog );—THOT m. ‘a lover’ (vt. 3). 3. arg (Decl. V.) forms a number of (mostly) neuter nouns. A penultimate short or a final vowel of the root is gunated. Z.g. gag n. Spesely (rt. =); wag n. ‘mind (rt. JF); FAG 7 ‘adoration’ (rt. qq); = Faq n. ‘mind, intellect’ (rt. fr). 4. qq (Decl. IX.) also forms neuter nouns, and before it a port. mate short or a final vowel of the root is likewise gunated. Z.g. S#a7 n. ‘birth’ (rt. §¥7); FAT, n. ‘action, deed’ (rt, FH); ai n, ‘armour’ (rt. I); AIAT, n. ‘a dwelling, house’ (rt. fag). 5. @ mostly forms neuter substantives which denote the instrument or means by which the action expressed by the root is accomplished. Before this suffix, too, the vowel of the root is gunated. Z.g. qian. ‘a drinking-cup, a cup, a vessel’ (vt qr, {gaia ); g=k 7. ‘the mouth, face.’ (rt. Fx); F&@ 2 ‘a garment’ (rt. FE, FW); [a «. ‘eye’ (rt. fr); srg 1. ‘ear’ (rt. of); Freer ». ‘command, rule, precept, &e. (rt. FE); —but gg m. or Fg £ ‘@ tusk’ (vt. FI). 6. fa (Decl. XIII, ) forms a large number of feminine substantives which generally denote the action or state expressed by the root, In most cases this suffix is added like, and the root undergoes before it the same changes which it undergoes before, the suffix g of the Past Pass. Participle. F.g. fifg J ‘conduct’ (rt. ft); fa J ‘praise’ (rt. |); wipter f ‘make, shape’ (vt. & with pr. sr); give Jf diberation’ (vt. 244 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 539— gq); gg Jf ‘knowledge’ (rt. gq); |E f ‘creation’ (vt. gH); zie f sight’ (vt. z3r); eRe Ff ‘speech’ (rt. 9); iw f ‘sacrifice,’ (vt. 7x); ifeq f loveliness’ ( rt. guy); wifey f ‘motion’ (rt. arg); Star f. ‘birth’ (rt. st); strafar f ‘striking, a blow’ (rt. gg with pr. sr); Ruf f ‘standing’ (vt opr); wf f ‘help’ ( rt. a7 ).—As the suffix is changed to a, so fq is changed to fi (or for), after roots ending in EA and after g and some other roots (but not after roots ending in 7); e.0. fon f. ‘scattering’ (rt. 35); fy f ‘cutting’ (vt. 7); BTA f. fatigue’ (rt, 1); but fygfy f ‘calamity’ (rt. gg with pr. fg; Past Pass. Pte. aga). 7. =r is added, instead of fa, to those roots ending in consonants which contain a prosodially long vowel and show the intermediate g in the Past Pass. Participle, and to derivative verbal bases (except causal bases and most roots of the churddi class, which take =4T; see 2, above). E.g. ggr f ‘exertion’ ( rt. gr); gar f ‘service’ ( rt. a7); gn f ‘worship’ (rt. gs); rer f ‘play’ (rt. HIF); AFH f ‘regard’ (rt. ger with pr. #1q ); fgm@r f ‘the wish to know’ (from Desid. base of rt, 0); fygqrar f ‘thirst’ (from Desid. base of rt. a1); gear J. ‘hunger’ (from Desid, base of rt, JA). 8. gis added to Desiderative bases to denote the agent. Z.g. frag ‘desirous to go’ (rt. 77); yqfSrfyg ‘desirous to approach’ (xt. Le: with pr. 37); fgzeg ‘desirous to see’ (rt. za); fame ‘desirous to create’ (rt. gsr); gqy ‘about to die, moribund’ (rt. 33). 9. uF may generally be added to any root or derivative verbal base to denote the agent. Before it, a penultimate short radical vowel is gunated, while a final vowel or penultimate st (except the a7 of set roots ending in 37) takes its Vriddhi substitute, Roots in a (T, @ and 3, § 297,0 ) insert ax before ats, E.g. ATE (fem, AfgFr) ‘splitting’ (xt. fag); digas m. ‘an informer’ (from Caus. of rt, 39); arg% ‘leading, a leader’ (rt. #Y); gH ‘taming’ (rt. gq); fraATAF ‘restraining’ (rt. Tq with pr. fq); sq® m. ‘a father’ (rt. 9); TAF ‘giving (rt. gr); JqIEgd ‘receiving’ (rt. ag); gras ‘killing’ (rt. ge). 10. g (Decl. XVI) also is added to roots and derivative verbal bases to denote the agent. It is added in every way like the termination gp of the 3 Sing. of the Periph. Fut. Par. or Atm, which, in fact, as has been already stated ( § 373), is the Nom. Sing. Mase. of this suffix. Z.g. Fg (fem. eft) ‘a doer, an agent’ (rt. 3); gg ‘a giver’ (rt. qn); aA1g ‘a protector’ (rt. &); aw ‘a speaker’ (rt. Fx); ag ‘a fighter’ (rt. Iq); &e. ¢ § 540.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 245 11. gq ( Decl. IV.) forms nouns denoting the agent. It is mostly added to roots that have prepositions prefixed to them; or the nouns formed with it are only used in composition with other nouns. Before ga roots are generally changed as they are changed before the suffix sta (9). Eg. AFA ‘living or dependent upon’ (rt. Sfrg with pr. A); qa fq ‘turning round’ (rt. gg with pr. qf ); fares © dwelling’ ( rt. Tg, FGA, with pr. 7); SEO, ‘in the habit of eating hot things’ (rt. gx); TAAL, ‘ regarding as beautiful’ (rt. #7) BR, ‘mak- ing efforts’ ( rt. say ); eqria, © lasting’ ( rt. gv); ify ‘about to be, future’ ( rt. 3x). 12. The primary suffixes 299 and gg, which are employed in the formation of the Comparative and Superlative, have been treated of in §§ 173-175. 6.—A LIST OF THE MOST COMMON SECONDARY OR TADDHITA SUFFIXES. § 540. 1. & forms substantives and adjectives with various signifi- cations; e.g. = Nn. (from gfe) ‘purity; qtaT 7. (from gaq) ¢ youth qT n. (from geo) friendship,’ qr n. (from 93) ¢ breadth; sre 7. (from HF) ¢a collection of crows; gpg m. (from ga) ‘a son’s som, a grandson; qr m. (from ng) “a citizen; qrffrg m. (from gf) fe lord of the aunt, a king; qa m, (from 7%) descendant of Puru;’ qa m. (from Su) ¢ a descendant of Upagu;’ JqTHETT mM. (from zgeHTOT) ‘ 2 grammarian; i3a% (from F7) ‘divine; sre (from Hary) ¢ coloured red;’ AIT Gon Tg) ‘visible; straw (from Aq) ¢ made of stone;” &c.* 2. 9 is similarly employed; e.g. fer n, (from gfRg) © poverty; qifvgex n. (from gfeea) "wivlony Ar n. (from gry) bravery; afore n. (from gforsy) © trade;’ AGF n. (from IGE) ¢ eagerness; [RA 7 (from gra1q) sovereignty;’ gig n. (from fig ) ‘manliness; gq ». (from aig) ¢ friendship;’ gargeg n. (from Farqiy) © generalshing IAT Mn ( from gray) ‘a Henfiey of the regal caste; arr m. (from my) © a de- scendant of Garga; Fey (from 2a) ‘divine; {F=q {fro 2) ‘celestial’ are ( from 777 ) bovine; grey (from xray) ¢ rustic’ gag ( from geq ) ¢ dental, suitable for the teeth; &c. * The examples will show that Vriddhi is often substituted for the first vowel of a noun to which the suffix 37 or ¥ is added. When the first vowel of a primitive word is preceded by I or &, being both the finals of a word, these semivowels are first changed to 4 and 7 respectively before Vriddhi can be substituted; e.g. JTF] from STEIN (changed first to FAFEHIW); AM ‘a descendant of Svashva,’ (from ¥#, changed first to 89%), The same rule is observed in regard to some other words in which J and F are not finals of a word; e.g. aT ¢ treating of accents’ (from ¥T, changed to §I7); &e. 246 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 540— 3. a nm. and qr f. form abstract nouns; eg. meg. or war f. (from air) ‘cowhood, the nature of a cow;’ zgeg n. or zzar f. (from zg) ‘“firm- ness;’ ¥{r&ed n. or WigqrS. (from yg) ‘cowardice; fa:qreea n. or formar Jf. (from fa:my) ‘worthlessness;’ syageg n. or ayar f. (from gag) © servi- tude; &c. The suftix gr sometimes denotes a collection of the objects expressed by the noun to which it is added; e. 7. qqgrf (from qa) ‘a collection of men, mankind.’ 4. zag m. is added to adjectives denoting a colour and to some other adjectives, to form abstract nouns; the adjectives to which it is attached undergo before it the same changes which they undergo before the com- parative and superlative suflixes ggg and gg (§173); e.g. giEag Me (from gy) ‘whiteness;’ @igasy m. (from gay) ‘greatness; RAs m. (from 3%) ¢ width ;” gag m. (from zg) ¢ firmness; gfe m. (from gy) ‘breadth;’ arfg@e m. (from 77%) heaviness.” Nouns formed by this suffix are always masculine and must be carefully distinguished from primary neuter nouns in gs, such as FAT n. ‘action,’ &e. (§ 539, 4). 5, #g and gg (Decl. VIIL) form possessive adjectives; e.g. frag (from wt) ‘possessed of intelligence, intelligent;’ Farrag ( from faa) ‘possessed of knowledge, wise.” The suffix gq is added to nouns the final or penultimate letter of which is 7, 31, or # , and to nouns that end ina surd or sonant unaspirate or aspirate Guttural, Palatal, Lingual, Dental, or Labial; e.g. gragq (from gra) © possessed of knowledge; faa ; faa ( from %%) ‘possessed of what ?; srgaq (from HH ) ¢ loving; gaa (from gag) ‘possessed of milk, milky; reas; (from Wray) posses- sing light’ gegq ( from fgg ) ‘possessed of, or accompanied by, the Maruts;” zggq (from VY) ‘ containing stones.” To other nouns @g is generally added; e.g. syffrAg (from s1fzy) ‘possessed of fire,” &c. Final gq and @ undergo before possessive suffixes the same changes which they undergo before vowel-terminations in weak cases; e.g. fgeaq (from FE; not 7a), vaEaq (from gaa; not gaiaq); sAifasAq (from sofa; not FpiaHa) © possessed of light’ fAagsAT (from fFgg; not frgsaa) ¢ containing learned men;’ so also gzrieas, &c. (See No. 6). 6. gq, a9, and fg (Decl. IV.) likewise form possessive adjectives. zd is mostly added to nouns ending in & which is dropped before gs fag mostly to nouns ending in sg (see No. 5); 7 appears only in a few derivatives. Z.g. qfeq (from qq) © wealthy; dst, (from go ) ‘splendid; quid, (from gaa) ‘ascetic; Fgriaq (from Ar) ‘intelligent; Fla (from r=) ‘eloquent.’ 7. gq forms adjectives which denote ‘containing’ that which is ex- pressed by the nouns to which gq is added;’ e.g. gftqa (from ge) ‘con- § 541.] FORMATION OE NOMINAL BASES. 247 taining or bearing flowers, guzfpg (from zuzg ) ‘thorny; exriaa (from gry) ‘afflicted with a disease, diseased.’ 8. @x (fem. my) forms adjectives which denote ‘made of, consisting of, abounding in’ that which is expressed by the nouns to which g¥ is added. Before gy and ray final §, T, g, and g must be changed to the corresponding nasal. Z.g. sizaay (from srzRs) ‘made of stone; srErAd (from sr1%r) ‘consisting of mango trees; symad (from eg ) ‘abounding in food;’ gremy (from gr) ‘made of wood; {ewe (from frag, not fara) ‘consisting of intelligence,” Nouns in gay are sometimes used as neuter substantives to denote ‘abundance of’ that which is expressed by the noun to which gy is added; e.g. stay ©. ‘abundance of food.’ 9. ara (fem. ret ) forms adjectives which denote ‘measuring as much as, reaching as far as’ that which is expressed by the noun to which gra is added; e.g. FwaTE (from FF) ‘as high as the thigh.’ 10. gq indecl. forms adverbs which generally denote the sense of ‘like that’ which is denoted by the noun to which ga is added, provided the likeness referred to be an action; e.g. Frgmorag indecl. (from TET) ‘like a Brahman’ (srgrorggefia © he studies like a Brahman’). 11. Other secondary suffixes, such as gy and ga which are employed in the formation of the Comparative and Superlative, and secondary nouns such as possessive pronouns, &c., have been mentioned separately in preceding paragraphs (§ § 169, 189, &c.) II.—COMPOUND NOMINAL BASES OR COMPOUNDS. § 541. Primary and secondary nominal bases, prepositions, and particles may be compounded with primary and secondary nominal bases, and the compound bases formed in this manner have the power to express various relations that exist between the objects or ideas denoted by their several members, or between that which they denote as a whole and other objects or ideas not denoted by their members—relations which, if no composition had taken place, would have had to be expressed by two or more inflected words or by subordinate sentences. £.g. USAT ‘a king’ + qe man’ = TATE ‘a king’s man’ (Tm gE) dE blue + IES a lotus’ = HSWIE ‘a blue lotus’ (Fregey); = “thied. 4 q9+ ‘world’ = tras ‘the three worlds’ Laken collectively (SATO YAATAT AAIEIT: )3 245 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [ § 542— a iT ‘long’ 4 ITE ‘an arm’ =FIHATE ‘a person possessed of long arms’ ikl 978 aH az) FTA ‘a Brahman’ + QA ‘a Kshatriya = ATATATIT «a Brahman and a Kshatriya, (srr=roTHT Ata); If ‘unto’ + af ‘final liberation’ = ATI ‘unto final liberation’ (=r qh). § 542. Nominal bases when employed as first members, or when they form any but the last member of a compound, take in general no case-terminations, but retain (except in so far as they are subject to the rules of Sandhi) their crude form unchanged. Nouns with two bases (§ 94) assume their weak base, nouns with three bases (§ 95) their middle base, pronouns the pronominal bases given in § 177, &c. Femi- nine adjectives that qualify a following member in the same compound, generally assume their masculine base. £.g. NT ‘a thief’ + yap ‘fear’ = rg fear from thieves’ (AR¥AT WAR): ®qad, ¢ beautiful’ (§ 109) + qfy ‘a husband’ = gqaeqfa ‘a beautiful husband’ (wgaTeafa:)- fagq ‘wise’ (§ 122) + ggw ‘a man’ = fygegew ‘a wise man’ ( fagregss: ). sreRg ‘our’ (§ 177) + {rg ‘father’ = sremfogq ‘our father’ (stented fan). gga ¢ the fifth’ + {ray ‘a wife’ = gqgawrat © the fifth wife, ( gaat wat )- FIT. ¢ beautiful’ 4 rT © 2 wife’ = EFF ‘a person who has a beautiful wife’ ( Eq ATAT IA G: ). § 543. (a) Final vowels of preceding members of compounds combine with the initial letters of succeeding members according to the rules in §§ 17—39. Preceding members that end in consonants first change their final consonants as they would be changed before the termination g of the Loc. Plur., and combine afterwards with succeeding members likewise according to the rules laid down in §§ 17—39. Z.g. A 2a ‘a Daitya’ +R ‘enemy’ =gemf (§ 18) ‘an enemy of the Daityas,’ =i ¢ Lakshmi’ + EU ‘a lord’=sfrgr (§ 18) ¢the lord of Lakshmi.’ TTT © the Ganges’ + gg ¢ water’ = fighga (§ 19) ‘the water of the Ganges.’ 27 ‘a god’ + dary ¢ sovereignty’ = 23a (§ 19) ‘the sovereignty of the gods.’ § 545.1] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 249 ag ‘Madhu’ + Tx ‘enemy’ = maf (§ 20 ) ‘the enemy of Madhu.’ ger ‘a tree’ + gry shade’ = ger=at™T ( § 38, a) ‘the shade of a tree. Fed? ‘Lakshm? + mrp ‘shade’ = ser or FaHtssrar (§ 88,0). agg, ‘a Marut’ 4 qf ‘a lord’ = gyeqly (28, ¢) ‘the lord of the Maruts.’ a 3 + aor ‘a troup’ = gggon (§ 28, d) ‘the troup of the Maruts.’ G9 (8 73, 3, ) ‘hunger’ + fgqray ‘thirst’ = gaat (§28, ¢ ) ‘hunger and thirst.’ “ b + qr ‘a disease’ = FET (§ 28, d) ‘hunger-disease.’ FIL (§76,2 a) ‘speech’ + grgey ‘harshness’ = graqresy (§ 27, ¢) ‘harshness of speech.’ » 4 + g@ ‘beginning’ = grEgw ( § 27, 0) the beginning of a speech.’ aqag (§ 88, 4) ‘mind’ + qq ‘gone’ = gaara (§ 35, a ) ‘gone or seated in the mind.’ et (§ 115, 3) ‘a king’ + ggg ‘a man’ = grargey ‘a king's man.’ 3 » + 233% ‘a king’ = grag ( §19 ) ‘a king of kings. (6) There are a few exceptions. When the bases Ag ‘a cat’ or IE ‘lip’ are preceded in the same compound by a word ending in sf or 7, these vowels y Toy optionally unite with the initial fy of Arg and Arg to 3{Y or it; fasatg or fywary ‘one who has bimba-like lips.’ When the word ayy is followed in the same compound by a word begin- ning with 1, both the final of qt and the initial 3f may remain un- changed; according to some, the ft of aff may before all vowels be changed to sf; e.g. TA + AF = dArsy or ary or ATH. Final gm and gg of first members of compounds before initial , q, q , are changed to gy and 3; final srg of first members remains before certain words unchanged; e.g. qif@ + Flew = ifs ‘a butter-jary’ 79g, + qa = srgeqra ‘an iron vessel.” These and other specialities are best learnt from the dictionary. § b44. Nouns employed as last members of compounds generally retain their bases unchanged; occasionally, however, they are liable to undergo slight changes, the most important of which will be noticed in the following paragraphs. Some compounds are peculiar in requir- ing certain suffixes to be added to them, either necessarily or optionally; these suffixes convey no new meaning beyond what is already expressed by the compound as such. For examples see below. § 545. (a) When a feminine noun which ends with one of the feminine suffixes #1, % or , forms the last member of a Tatpurusha-compound in 32 8 250 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 546— which the first member governs the second member (§ 550, a, 0), or of a Dvigu-compound which conveys a derivative meaning such as is usual- ly denoted by a Taddhita suffix (§ 560 ), or of a Bahuvrihi-compound, its final vowel is shortened (see, however, § 566, ). Under the same conditions the final aft of ayy is changed to 3, For examples see below. (0) When a nominal base which ends in a long vowel forms the last member of a compound word of the neuter gender or of an adverbial compound, its final long vowel must be shortened ( final & be changed to g, final =r and =f to 3 ). § 546. All compound nominal bases have by the native grammarians been divided into four classes, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrihi, Dvandva and Avyayibhava. 1. A Tatpurusha-compound may, in general, be described as a compound which denotes that which is expressed by its second member, determined or qualified by what is expressed by its first member. When the first member of a Tatpurusha stands in apposition to the second, so that, if the compound were dissolved, it would have to be expressed by a substantive or adjective agreeing in case with the second member, the Tatpurusha-compound is called a Karmadhiraya. Again, a Karma- dhéraya.compound, the first member of which is a cardiral number, is called a Dvigu-compound. It will appear, then, that a Tatpurusha- compound to which neither the term Karmadhiraya nor the term Dvigu is applicable, must in general be a compound the first member of which, if the compound were dissolved, would be governed by the second member, and would have to be expressed by a word in an oblique case. Z. g. Tatpurusha only : grey ‘the king’s man’ (qq: g&w:). Compare the English ‘house-top,” &c. Karmadbiraya: figrega ‘a blue lotus’ (fregegegs). Compare the English ‘low-land,” &e. Dvigu: fagad ‘the three worlds collectively’ (geqrori IATA FHT) Compare the English “fortnight,” &c. Tatpurusha-compoundsin general may be called Determinative com- pounds; those Tatpurusha-compounds which are neither Karmadhiraya nor Dvigu, Dependent determinative compounds. Karmadhiraya compounds may be called Appositional determinative compounds, and Dvigu-compounds Numeral determinative compounds. 2. A Bahuvrihi-compoundis a compound which denotes something else than what is expressed by its members, It generally attributes § 546.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 251 that which is expressed by its second member, determined or qualified by what is denoted by its first member, to something denoted by neither of its members. When dissolved, it must be expressed by more than two inflected words, viz., by the two words which are its members, generally standing both in the Nominative case, and by a relative or demonstrative pronoun in any except the Nominative case. A Bahu- vribi compound has the nature of an adjective and assumes the gender of the word which expresses that of which the Bahuvrihi-compound forms an attribute. Z.g. Bahuvribi: igre ‘a person with a yellow garment’ (farsa aa q:). IAEA ‘one who has a beautiful wife’ (Bradt AMATI" a). Compare the English ‘blue-beard,” ‘noble-minded,’ &e. Bahuvrihi-compounds may be called Attributive compounds. 0 3. A Dvandva-compound is a compound which denotes all the per- sons or things denoted by its several members. When dissolved, its members must be connected with each other by the particle 5 ‘and.’ Whereas Tatpurusha and Bahuvrihi-compounds always consist of only two members (either of which may be a simple or a compound word), Dvandva-compounds may consist of two or three or more members. £.g. Dvandva: srigroretizry ‘a Brahman and a Kshatviya’ (srrarorer exfaas)- AMANFTAITET © a Brahman, a Kshatriya, a Vaishya, and a Shfidra.’ Dvandva-compounds may be called Copulative compounds, 4. An Avyayibhava-compound is indeclinable; its first member is generally a preposition or adverb which, if the compound were dissolved, would govern the second member. There are some Avyayibhiva-com- pounds the sense of which cannot be expressed by their members, when uncoinpounded, but requires for its expression other words than those actually compounded. £.g. Avyayibhiva: ga&fir ‘towards the fire’ (1% gf). Falak ¢ according to one’s ability’ ( RRERwlHsd ‘not going beyond one’s powers’). Avyayibhiva-compounds may be called Adverbial compounds. Note.—The student is warned not to regard as an Avyayibhiva every compound that happens to be an adverb. Thus a Bahuvrihi-compound, being an adjective, may be used adverbially, but it would not on that account cease to be a Bahuvrihi, 252 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 547T— 1.—TATPURUSHA OR DETERMINATIVE COMPOUNDS. («)—Dependent Determinative Compounds. § 547. The second member is determined or qualified by the first member, which, if the compound were dissolved, would stand— 1. In the Accusative case; e.g. Fantaa (N. Sing. Masc. °g:) ‘one who has resorted to K rishna’ (Fw faa). ERCIGIG (N. Sing. Masc. °g:) ‘one who has overcome pain’ (z:@weia:)- gEaga (Neut., N. Sing. gq) ¢pleasure that lasts a moment’ (gga geq). 2. In the Instrumental case; e.g. qreq1et (Masc., N. Sing. %j:) * wealth acquired by grain’ (qrezare:). Arggza(N. Sing. Masc. °zr:) ‘like his mother’ (®rar Taw: ). garg (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) ‘protected by Hari’ (gum ara: ). aire ( N. Sing. Mase, a3) split with the nails’ (qf). 3. In the Dative case; e.g. JIT (Neut., N. Sing. °g) ‘wood for a sacrificial post’ (Far ZTE). mies (XN. Sing. Masc. °g:) ¢good for cattle’ (ara f&a:). fared (Mase. and Neut,, ®t Fem. ) ‘intended for a Bréhman’; e.g. {gta gu: ‘broth for a Br.,’ {gaat wawy: ‘gruel for a Br. ESD) gy: ‘milk for a Br.” (Though compounded of {gst + He, the sense of fea, when no composition takes place, is not expressed by the two words {gs and AT; e.g. an qq: is simply fester qu: ) 4. In the Ablative case; e. g. Fieag (Neut., N. Sing. °ga) ‘fear from a thief’ (SterEaHg)- gewia (N. Sing. Masc. %q:) ‘afraid of a wolf’ (g®1gta:). @aqtaa (N. Sing. Masc. °q:) ‘fallen from heaven’ (wgmyeqiad: ). b. In the Genitive case; e.g. TstgEd (Masc., N. Sing. %q:) ‘the king’s man’ (Trg: 8a: )- qegey (Mase, N. Sing %g:) ‘the man of him,’ i.e. ‘his man’ ( q& gE: ). fafkey (Fem. N, Sing. °gt) ‘a mountain-torrent’ (Ta). gama (Neut., N. Sing. °gay) ‘a hundred fools’ (g@ioi way). § 549.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 253 6. In the Locative case; e.g. sregnive (N. Sing, Mase. %og:) ¢ skilled in dice’ (stat yg Fue?) gaqrefiw (N. Sing. Masc. °q:) ‘dependent on God’ (from gag and the preposition arf, With the suffix ge added to the whole compound). BHT (N. Sing Masc. g:) ¢ cooked in a pot’( ®yiert Tw®:). gaigsa (N. Sing. Neut. °gy) ‘done in the forenoon’ (qaig HAR). 7. Sometimes the first member is an indeclinable; e.g. e3aFa (N. Sing. Neut. °gy) ‘done by one’s self’ (za% Faw): ~ griwga (N. Sing. Neut. °gey) half done’ (grid Faw)- qaY® (N. Sing. Neut. wy) ‘eaten there’ (ga FH). § 548. There is a class of Tatpurusha compounds the sense of which cannot be expressed by their members, when uncompounded, because the last member, which may be a root or a primary noun, is either not used alone, or, when used by itself, does not convey the meaning which it conveys in the compound, Compounds of this kind are usually called Upapada-compounds, Examples are: FFwaEr (§539,1 ; N. Sing. Mase. °F) “a pot-maker’; (not FFF HIT. It it usual to dissolve this and similar compounds by means of such phrases as g#g FAS FFIEC). gra (§ 539,15 N. Sing. Mase. °:) ‘one who sings a verse of the Samaveda’ (FI TAHT AAT). size (§ 539,1; N. Sing. Masc. °%:) ‘one who takes a share’ (siz FAITE) gagd, (§ 492, a; N. Sing. Mase. °gr) ‘one who kills Vritra’ (ga gedit Faz). garg ($492, b; N. Sing. Masc, %g) ‘one who conquers all’ (gat- Fadia aT). § 549. In certain Tatpurushas the first member (against § 542) retains its case-termination ; many of the compounds in which this is the case are proper names or have otherwise a restricted meaning. Z.g. AREF ( N. Sing. Neut. aq) ‘done with strength’ (strat FAH). AFA ( N. Sing. Masc. %ng:) ‘blind by nature’ (sgn + qe). sraaregd (N. Sing. Masc. °q;) ‘fifth with one’s self; 4.c. himself and four others.’ qe@iqg ( Neut., N. Sing. °gag) ¢ voice for another’ (qt qzw)- serge ( Neut., N. Sing. °z3) ‘voice for one’s self’ (srr gga). 254 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§550— gugmra (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) ¢ come from afar’ (Fra + trata). Frernga or grdrga (Mase, N, Sing. °q:) ¢ the son of a slave,’ used as a term of contempt. grafer (Mase., N. Sing. °g:) ¢ Yudhishthira’ i.e. firm in battle ( ghar fore). zieggr (N. Sing. Masc, °F) ¢ touching the heart’ (gid Tyzaify gfieg® )- arefesw (N. Sing. Mase. °&:) ‘born in autumn’ (Fel stag EA AMG). § 550. (a) Some compounds, of which the first member would govern the second member if no composition had taken place, are like- wise considered Tapturusha-compounds by the native grammarians; e.g. ga®r (Masc., N. Sing. °g:) ‘ the forepart of the body’ (7% FH). aun (Mase, N. Sing. °g: ) ‘mid-day’ (geaag:)- ! grgstita® ( N. Sing. Mase. °: ) ‘one who has found a livelihood’ ( sre shia ); also sifaFEg:: arta (NV. Sing. Masc. °q:) born a month ago’ (H1&Y ATa™ I& a). (6) Similar are compounds the first member of which is a preposi- tion the sense of which, when the compound is dissolved, must be expressed by the Past Pass. Participle of certain roots to which that preposition is prefixed; e.g. afyaie (N. Sing Mase. °g:) ‘surpassing a garland’ (Afdsr=al A1e1®)- fspran®a (N. Sing. Mase. °Ra:) ‘departed from Kaushimbi’ ( forseprea : HERAT: ). (c) Compounds like sysrraror (Masc., N. Sing. r:) ¢one who is not a Brahman’ (x stigron:), saga (Masc., N, Sing. °ga:) ‘not a horse’ (7 + sr77:) are likewise called Tatpurusha. § 551. (a) Dependent and Appositional determinative compounds assume mostly the gender of their final member. Dependent deter- minative compounds like grgsfita®, however ( § 550, a ), and the com- pounds described in § 550, b, such as AGATE, take the gender of the noun which they qualify. (6) There are a few exceptions to this rule. Dependent deter- minative compounds (provided their first member be not the negative prefix 37 ), the last member of which is one of the nouns AT, GI, TAT Z(ST, OF f=rz1T, may optionally he feminine or neuter;e-g. grayora=T fom. or FTEUEH nent. ¢ a host of Brihmans;’ and there are some Tatpurusha- $0583: FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 255 compounds ending in gry and qT, that must be neuter, e.g. gg=e neut. ¢ the shade of (many) sugar-canes;’ £agggay nent. ‘an assembly of princes.” Tatpurusha-compounds ending in grag (for qifi) ¢ night,” and ag or wig (for wgey) ‘day,’ are generally masc.; e.g. qaqa Mase. ‘the first part of the night,’ garg masc. ‘the forenoon; on the other hand, gga ‘a clear day’ and others are neuter. (See § 561.) § 552. The power of composition, although great, is not unlimited, and the native grammarians have given many rules stating, not merely, when it is permitted to compound two words, but also, when it is for- bidden to do so. Here a few examples must suffice. The two nouns srier ‘an eye’ and ror ‘blind’ cannot be compounded to express the sense ¢ blind of an eye’ (s1gurr sHror:), because in general an adjective is compounded with a preceding Instr. case (or rather, with a noun which, if no composition were to take place, would stand in the Instr. case) only when that which is expressed by the adjective, is caused by what is expressed by the noun in the Instr. case, whereas in the present instance ‘ blindness’ is not caused by ‘the eye.” Again, in phrases like Fog fz sig: ¢ the Brihman is the best of men,’ it is not permitted to form a compound of the two words a and srg. An ordinal number cannot be compounded with a noun in the Genit, case; (e.g. gat Tg: ‘the sixth of those present’). Nominal bases in g or 31, denoting an agent (§539, 9 and 10), are, with some exceptions, not compounded with a noun in the Genit. case (e.g. syqi @gr ‘the creator of the water, sizer gras: ¢ one who cooks rice; but FITAF ‘a worshipper of the gods’). (b)—Appositional Determinative Compounds (Karmadhdraya). § 553. The following are instances of appositional determinative com- pounds given by the native grammarians : #r@rgs ( Neut., N. Sing. °g%q) ‘a blue lotus’ (Frogs). agar (Masc., N. Sing. %g:) ‘an only lord.’ guoHtATE® ( Mase, N. Plur. °y:) the old MimAmsakas’; i.c. E the old school of the MimAanisakas. ager (Masc, N. Sing. °gr:) ‘a good scholar.’ wrargieq: ( N. Sing. Mase. °g:) “first bathed and afterwards anointed’ (95 79: TAT YIEH:)- Farga ( N. Sing. Neu. ‘qq ) ‘done and not done’ i.e. badly done ( HF ¥ ITF = )- Farag (N. Sing. Neut. °gay) ¢ blackish-variegated.” gzzraa (N. Sing. Neat, aw) «of similar white colour’ 256 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 554— JAB (N. Sing. Mase. °fq:) ‘a young bald-headed person’ (gar @s). garage (N. Sing. Neut. °gg) Slightly brown.’ gg&T ( Masc, N. Sing. °g:) ‘a good man.’ grata ( Masc., N. Sing. °F: ) ‘an excellent teacher’ (garg strama:). qua ( N. Sing. Neut. °gay ) ‘made into a heap.’ gazA| ( N. Sing. Mase. °q: ) ¢ black like a cloud’ (ga ZT IA). gasraor (Mase, N. Sing. %p;) ‘a Brdhman who worships the gods’ (FATTY ATRIN:)- § 554. In some Karmadhéraya-compounds the qualifying member takes the second place; e.g. gears ( Masc., N. Sing. gp: ) ¢ a tiger-like man’ (srr 39 g&w:), USFFT ( Mase, N. Sing. °g: ) ¢ an elephant-like king,’ i.e. an excellent king (F3yT ga TS)- gagary (em., N. Sing, °fy:) ‘ a young female elephant.’ anragzrr (Fem., N. Sing. z1) ¢ a barren cow.’ vrseaT (Neut., N. Sing. gg) ‘another king’ (steer Tran)- § 565. (a) Hg, when used as first member of Karmadhiraya and Bahuvrihi-compounds, is changed to ®gT; e.g. Karmadhiraya : ggg (Masc., N. Sing. °g:) ‘the great god,’ a name of Shiva. Bahuvrihi : ggramg (N. Sing. Masc. °g) ‘a person with big arms.’ (0) The base of the interrogative pronoun, 3g, or F (§ 194), some- times also gr, and before words beginning with vowels and a few words beginning with consonants zg , are used as first members of Karamadharaya-compounds to express censure or contempt; e.g. fre, (Masc., N. Sing. °qr) ‘a bad king’ (literally ¢ what sort of a king ¥ greqay TS): FIT or Frey (Mase, N. Sing. °g:) ‘a bad man, a coward’ (Fieqa: gE). . wg (Masc.,, N. Sing. °a1:) ‘a bad horse’ (Ffegarsa:). § 556. Words which denote a point of the compass (like ga ‘eastern,’ gqT ‘northern’ &e.) and the cardinal numbers fg ‘two,’ fg ‘three,’ &e. cannot enter into composition with other words to form with them Karmadhéraya-compounds, except when the Karmadhiraya-compound is a proper name. /f.g., it is forbidden to compound the two words gstqr ger: ‘northern trees,” or gg ayrgrom: ‘five Brihmans’; but the two words § 559.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 257 gd ‘seven’ and =K{¥ ‘a Rishi’ are compounded in the word gf ( Masc., N. Plur. °§a:) ‘the seven Rishis,’ because this compound is a proper name for the constellation of the Great Bear. § 557. (a) Contrary to this rule, a word denoting a point of the compass or a cardinal number may form a Karmadhiraya-compound with another noun, provided the compound so formed is not used by itself, but has a Taddhita suffix added to it, or conveys, in addition to the sense which it would convey as a Karmadhiraya, a derivative meaning such as is usually denoted by a Taddhita suffix, or provided the compound becomes the first member of another compound. Thus it is allowable to compound 93 ‘eastern’ + zr®r ‘a hall’ =qaTST ‘the eastern hall,” provided this compound is not used by itself, but has a Taddhita suffix added to it ; qzrret + Taddh. 3 = ide ¢ being in the eastern hall’ Similarly gy + #rg = quATg ¢ six mothers’ (not used by itself) + Taddh, 31 =wrugrgy ‘the child of six mothers’ (i.e. Kérttikeya) ; f& + 70 = {gan © two cows,’ not used in this sense, but, changed to fa, in the sense of ‘bartered for two cows; gg + my =gzmr ‘five cows,’ not used by itself, but as first member in the Bahuvrihi-compound qa ‘one whose wealth consists in five cows ;’ ete. (6) Moreover, a cardinal number is compounded with another noun when the compound so formed denotes an aggregate; e.g. {§ © three’ + gaa ‘world’ = fgg ( Neut,, Nom. Sing. °qa) ‘the aggregate of the three worlds’ or ¢ the three worlds collectively.’ (c )— Numeral Determinative Compounds (Dwvigu). § 558. A Karmadhiraya-compound formed by § 557 is called a Dvigu, when its first member is a cardinal number. Dvigu-compounds which have not entered into composition with other words, and which neither have received a Taddhita suffix, nor convey a meaning such as is usually denoted by such a suffix, must, as will appear from § 557, b, always denote an aggregate. Z.g. gaa ( Neut., N. Sing. °qay) the three worlds collectively.’ TgIa ( Neut., N. Sing. ‘ma) ‘the four Yugas collectively.’ § 559. Drvigu-compounds that denote an aggregate are commonly neuter. But when the final member of a Dvigu-compound ends in sf, the feminine suffix § is generally added to it ; some nouns in 37, however, retain their final #1, and in this case the Dvigu-compound is neuter. Feminine nouns in ar shorten their final or substitute 3 for it. Nouns 3 we either drop their final 31, or substitute g for stg. Z.g. 33 8 258 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 560— gag (Fem, N. Sing. °gft) from ggg + fe (Neut.), ‘an aggregate of five roots.’ qaqa (Neut., N. Sing. °gqqy) from gmg + qig (Neut.), ‘an aggre- gate of five dishes.’ FEZ ( Neut., N. Sing. °z7) or gg@Ft ( Fem, N. Sing. a) from q 9g + @21 (Fem. ), €an aggregate of five beds.’ gaa (Neut., N. Sing. “err ) or qmaeft (Fem, N. Sing. ft) from gz + arg, ( Mase. ) * five carpenters.’ § 560. Dvigu-compounds which, although no Taddhita suffix is added to them, express a meaning usually denoted by a Taddhita suffix, assume the gender of the nouns which they qualify, and their last members are subject to § 545 ; e.g. ggEHqr® in the sense of ¢ prepared in five dishes’ may be masc., fem., or neut.; similarly gga (from gzg + at) ‘bartered for five cows,’ &e. § 561. General rule for all Determinative Compounds :— The following is an alphabetical list of the more common nominal bases which undergo slight changes when they are the last members of determinative compounds : 1. wigfe ‘a finger’ is changed to syge after numerals and indeclin- 2 2 ables; e.g. AFS ‘two fingers long.’ 2. argyle ‘a handful’ may optionally be changed to stey& in Dvigu. compounds (except those described in § 560) after {ZF and fr; e.g. ZT newt. or ARATE neuf, ‘two handfuls; but only zz ¢ bought for two handfuls.’ 3. wgq ‘a day’ is changed to #17; €.9. THIET mase. a holy day; Zrg masc. ‘an aggregate of two days; but it is changed to wig after in- declinables, gg, and words denoting parts of the day ; e.g. garg Mase. “ the whole day,” gaig masc. ¢ forenoon; (see § 551, b). 4, a ‘a bull, a cow,’ is changed to irq, except in the Dvigu-com- pounds described in § 560 ; e.g. grag © an excellent bull,’ qmgag newt. “a collection of five cows; but {zi ‘ bartered for two cows.’ = 5. =r ‘aship’ is changed to arg after =, and in Dvigu-com- pounds except those described in § 560; e.g. spray newt. ‘half a ship; fear neut. ‘two ships; but El ‘bartered for five ships.’ 6. qa, “a road’ is at the end of all compounds changed to gr; e.g. GHIA masc. ¢ the path of religion’ ; grey ( Bahuvrihi) a country, &c., ¢in which the roads are pleasant.’ § 562. ] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES. 259 7. us ‘a king’ is changed to grt; ¢.9. QUAIL masc, ‘an excel- lent king.’ 8. qi ‘night’ is changed to gr after numerals, indeclinables, ad, words denoting parts of the night, HEI, and guy; e.g. Yu mas. ‘the whole night,’ TET masc. ‘the first part of the night; fara newt. ‘two nights’ (see § 551, 8). 9. @Ry ‘a thigh’ is changed to gg after IW, qs, HT, and after a word which denotes an object with which a thigh is compared ; e.g. FaGF newt. ‘the thigh of a deer; wmwHasy neut. ‘a thigh like a plank.’ 10. my ‘a friend’ is changed to qa; e.g. Foray mas. ‘a friend of Krishna ; {Syggm masc. ‘a dear friend.’ But these changes do generally not take place in determinative compounds the first member of which is g, or fw (§ 555, 0), or the negative prefix a; e.g. gus, masc. (N. Sing. gas) ‘a good king; Hata masc. (N. Sing. f&gam) ‘a bad friend ; srgrsrd, masc, (N. Sing. TINT) ‘one who is not a king.’ 2.—Banuverinr or ATTRIBUTIVE COMPOUNDS. § 562. (a) The following are instances of attributive compounds: qrareay (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) ‘one with a yellow garment’ ( figasag qq). CCE Fy (N. Sing. Masc. g:) ¢‘long-armed’ (Hi qT AEA ql). migig® (N. Sing. Masc. °%:) a village, &c., ‘to which water has approached’ (srgga#® 4 &:)- Fg (N. Sing. Masc. %j:) ‘one by whom a car is drawn’ (gy (Ter a= |). 3ugagy (N. Sing. Masc. °g3:) ‘one to whom cattle are offered’ (Fuga: TEE aE 0). IZA (N. Sing. Masc. °q:) a pot, &c., ‘from which boiled rice has been taken out’ (IZTAITT TTIE:). #eged (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) a village, &c., ‘in which the men are heroes’ (fiyr: FEIT ARAT:). Faza (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) ‘one who has done his work’ (Fd m& IT 1). gagmamg (N. Sing. Mase. “qr) ‘one whose name is Devadatia’ (FAT TH 97 Tq). 260 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 563— aera (N. Sing. Mase, %g:) ‘one whose name is Nala’ (f@rsiapar T=" a). samara (N. Sing. Mase. °q:) ‘one whose chief (aim) is justice’ (qa: TAT TH G2). faeargr (N. Sing. Mase. °g:) ‘one whose. highest (occupation) is thinking,’ ‘thoughtful’ (fy=ar a7 a= a). gegtie (N. Plur. Masc. °ge:) the gods ‘of whom Indra is the first,’ i.e. Indra and the others (z=z strfaafat &). (0) As the preceding may in general be considered to have been appositional determinative compounds which, by changing their original sense so as to make it become the attribute of some other sub- ject, and by assuming the gender of the noun which they qualify, have been changed into attributive compounds, so the following com- pounds may be looked upon as dependent determinative compounds that have undergone a similar change. tage (N. Sing. Masc. °aq:) ‘one who has the brightness of light- ning’ (AFT TT T9199 {:). : Zarate (N. Sing. Masc. °fy:) ‘of god-like shape’ (FaRrarstada a). In some compounds of this kind the dependent member is placed last; e.g. srigqrior (N. Sing. Mase. °far:) ‘one who has a sword in his hand’ (erf@: quo a= a:). guzg (N. Sing. Masc. °&:) ‘one who bears a staff in his hand’ (gust ew a= @). (c) Attributive compounds the first member of which is a cardinal number, must not be confounded with numeral determinative or Dvigu- compounds. Instances of attributive compounds of this kind are: ras (N. Sing. Masc. °q:) ‘one who has three eyes, a name of Shiva, ( fifor Sra ag q)- Iggd (N. Sing. Masc. °@:) ‘one who has four faces, a name of Brahman (sei gar a= a). § 563. The following attributive compounds may be compared with the Tatpurusha-compounds described in § 550 b, c: aqoy or ggfyager (N. Sing. Mase. °oy:) a tree &c. ‘from which the leaves have fallen down’ ( qqfraifer guile JeATEE:). frst (N. Sing. Mase. °qr:) “devoid of energy’ ( {did ast JEATE:)- sg (N. Sing. Masc. °g:) ‘high-nosed’ (gran AMF! I= &:2). aga (N. Sing. Mase. °@:) ‘one who has no son’ (gat a= ATR G:)- § 566.] FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 261 § 564. (a) ggg when used as the first member of Bahuvrihi-com- pounds is changed to wgy (§ 555, a); e.g. wgrarg (N. Sing. Masc. °g:) ‘one who has big arms’ (mera qE ag a). (6) The indeclinable gg ‘with,’ when used as the first member of Bahuvrihi-compounds, is often changed to q; e.g. aga or ggygd (N. Sing. Masc. °g:) ¢ with one’s son,’ or ‘accompanied by one’s son’ (gam qT or gga: ). § 565. The general rule concerning feminine nouns, which has been given in § 542, applies also to feminine nouns which form the first mem- bers of Bahuvrihi-compounds, provided those feminines do not end in , and provided the second member of the compound is neither an ordinal number, nor one of the words fSrr, HAtFT, FAWN &c.; e.g. aT (N. Sing. Mase. 0) ‘one who has a brindled cow’ (Rat ae q; AY is changed to 71 by § 545, a). wag (N. Sing. Masc. °F:) ‘one who has a beautiful wife’ (wqadt WAT I& q:; the final 317 of gy is shortened by § 545, a). But Fegrofityg (N. Sing. Masc. °q:) ‘one to whom a virtuous woman is dear’ ( Heol 97 gx @:); the first member retains here its feminine form, in order that this compound may be distinguished from Herod ¢ one to whom a virtuous man is dear.” For similar reasons the feminine forms are retained in other compounds, such a QUIET, Arete, do. § 566. (a) The word ay, and feminine nouns in &, when they are the last members of Bahuvrihi-compounds, are subject to § 545; e.g. _a, E7TFM. (b) Bahuvrihi-compounds, the last member of which is a feminine noun in g or, or a noun ending in sg, assume the suffix , Many other Bahuvrihi-compounds assume the same suffix &, either necessarily or optionally. Bahuvrihi-compounds in ga must take the suffix g in the feminine. Z.g. agagi® (N. Sing. Masc. °#:) a country &c. ‘in which there are many rivers.’ aawg® (N. Sing. Fem. °gr) a woman ‘whose husband is dead.” qgae or agATe® or agAtetd (N. Sing. Mase. °:, or %:) ‘one who has many garlands’ (qr). 262 ; SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§ 567— merames (N. Sing. Masc. %:) or gErame (N. Sing. Mase. ‘zm: ‘one who possesses great fame.’ agEg, N. Sing Fem. gzearfasr, a woman ‘who has many masters.’ § 567, The following are some specimens of compounds which like- wise are considered Bahuvrihi-compounds by the native grammarians : gazam ( N. Plur. Masc. °zpr:) ‘about ten’ ( ‘nine’ or ‘eleven’ ). straaraar (N. Plur. Mase. °zr:) ‘near twenty.’ fzz (N. Plur. Mase. °gxr:) ‘two or three.’ fgaar (N. Plur. Masc. °zr:) ‘twice ten’ (4. e, ‘twenty’), grerorgat (Fem., N. Sing. 7) ‘south-east.’ Farrar indecl., seizing each other by the hair.’ guergue indecl., beating each other with sticks.’ § 568. Some nouns undergo slight changes when they are the last members of Bahuvrihi-compounds; the most common of them are : 1. fer ¢ an eye’ is changed to stay; when yfyf is used literally for the eye of a living being, the Bahuvrihi-compound takes in the feminine the feminine suffix g; e.g. @fgare, Fem. Sifgaaf, ‘red-eyed. 2. reg ‘smell’ is changed to arfey after g, gu &c.; e.g. gtey ‘having a good smell, fragrant; gaar{ee ‘smelling like a lotus.’ 3. SAT ‘a wife’ is changed to fer; e.g. RESUE ‘having a young wife.’ tL gFq ‘a tooth’ is changed to gq afterg, and after numerals when the Bahuvrihi-compound is intended to indicate a certain age; e.g. fgza (N. Sing. Masc. fggq, Fem. fggdr) ‘having two teeth. 5. gg® ‘a bow’ is changed to wea, eg. TFT ( N. Sing. Masc. °sgr) ‘having a bow made of horn,’ a name of Vishnu. 6. gi ‘law’ is changed to THT, when it is preceded by only one word in the same compound; e.g. FTTH, ‘one who knows the law.’ 7. quiy®r ‘a nose’ is changed to qq chiefly after prepositions; e.g. gaa ‘high-nosed.’ : 8. qr ‘a foot’ is changed to qIg after numerals, after g, and in certain other compounds; e.g. Fag ‘biped; Ferg. ‘having feet like a tiger's.’ 9. ga ‘offspring’ and Fr ‘understanding’ are changed to mare and Fag after g, §:, and the negative prefix 3; e.g. sygsag (N. Sing. Mase. °qr:) ¢ without offspring; gaa" ‘stupid.’ $571.1 FORMATION OF NOMINAL BASES, 263 10. gf ‘a thigh’ is changed to mor when used literally for the thigh of an animal ; e.g. €ygqFy ¢ having long thighs.’ (For qi, see § 561, 6.) 3.—Dvaxpva or CoPULATIVE COMPOUNDS. § 569. A Dvandva-compound denotes either the mutual union of the objects denoted by its several members, or it denotes their aggregate. In the former case the Dvandva-compound assumes the gender of its final member and the terminations of the Dual or Plural according as it denotes two or more objects ; in the latter case it is neuter and takes the terminations of the Singular. Z.g. gifergat (Mase. Du.) ¢ Yudhishthira and Arjuna.’ STAT or Ja (Masc. Du.) * wealth and religion.’ argue Bafaeerat: (Mase. Plur. ) ¢a Brihman, and a Kghatriya, and a Vaishya, and a Shfidra.’ ATOFE (Mase. Du.) a ‘pea-hen and a cock; but FHzAgAl (Fem. Du.) ‘a cock and a pea-hen.’ qriorgrga ( Neut. Sing. ) ‘hand and foot.’ AfdwFeq ( Neut. Sing.) ¢ the snake and the ichneumon’ ( as an instance of two natural enemies ). gag (Neut. Du.) or gua (Neut. Sing. ) ‘pleasure and pain.’ zirareor ( Neut. Du. ) or zfidveorsy, ( Neut. Sing. ) ¢ cold and heat.’ There are exceptions; eg. spaaEar (Mase. Du.) ‘a horse and a mare ; srgrera: ( Masc. Sing. ) ¢ day and night.’ § 570. The order in which the various members of a Dvandva-com- pound are arranged, depends partly on their meaning and partly on their form. Words denoting various castes should be placed in the order of the castes, beginning from the highest ; the name of an elder should precede that of his younger brother; and, in general, the more impor- tant word should be placed first. ‘Words ending with g or g should precede others (e.g. REM); likewise words which begin with a vowel and end in & (e.g. SqFem); and words which contain fewer syllables (e.9- Rraraay). In a case where two of the three last rules would be simultaneously applicable, the later rule should take effect in preference to the preceding one ; e.g. ZEEE, FIT, TIRTAY. § 571. (a) When two nouns in sg expressive of relationship, or two nouns in sf that are designations of sacrificial priests, form a Dvandva- compound, the final = of the first member is changed to #r; the same 264 ~~ SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. * [§572— change takes place when a noun in sg expressive of relationship forms a Dvandva together with gz. Z.g. Araya (Mase. Du.) ¢ father and mother.’ fyargar (Mase. Du.) © father and son.’ grargiay (Mase. Du. ) ¢ the Hotri and the Poti’ (two priests), - (0) When the names of two deities that are usually mentioned together in sacrifices form a Dvanda-compound, the final vowel of the first member is mostly lengthened ; e.g. Rrarasoy (Mase. Du.) ¢ Mitra and Varuna.’ sufiat (Mase. Du.) © Agni and Soma,’ Similar changes take place in similar compounds ; e.g. TTT or FATEH Or arr or fEaeafyany (Fem. Du.) ‘heaven and earth.’ ] § 572. When the last member of an aggregative Dvanda-compound ends either in a palatal consonant, or in g, g, or g, the vowel gf is ~ added to it ; e.g. wage, (Neut.,, N. Sing. “srg) ‘ a skin and a garland’ (from egg + a). | ge qrag (Neut.,N. Sing. °gyq) ‘an umbrella and a shoe’ (from gy + 319g )- ~ But ICAL { N. Du..of MITTIN ) ¢ the rains and the autumn.’ § 573. Itis allowable to use instead of the compound Fras (§ 871, a) simply the Dual of {3g ; {4a ¢ father and mother; similarly ASAT or Ey ‘father and mother-in-law; TAL ‘ brother and sister ;’ ga ¢son and daughter,” &ec. 4,—AvyaYiBHAVA OR ADVERBIAL COMPOUNDS. § 574. The final letters of nouns that form the final .member of an Avyayibhava-compound, are subject to the following changes : (a) Final long vowels are shortened (as in the neuter), final @ is changed to g, and final gt or 3} to 3. (0) Final s1, whether it be original or substituted for str in accord- ance with («), is changed to sq (.e. it receives the termination of the Nom. or Acc. Sing. of a neuter noun in 37), (c) Final Hq, of masc, and fem, nouns is changed to Hq; final HY of neuter nouns may be changed to st or to HH. §577.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 265 (4) The termination grag must be added to TE, ATH, SE, fea, =? and to certain other nouns. (¢) wry may optionally be added to all nouns which end in a surd or sonant unaspirate or aspirate Guttural, Palatal, Lingual, Dental, or Labial. § 575." The following are instances of adverbial compounds: srfrefe ‘upon Hari; ATYTITH, ‘on the cow-herd’ (=rfer-+urar, § 574, @ and 0); WTA, ‘on the soul’ (erferteatreRsy, § 574, ¢); ggqsa ‘under the king’ (S9+Tre1, § 574, ¢); Sgmgs ‘near the autumn’ (3g+atg, § 574, d); IgE or IGA ‘near fuel” (Iq, § 574, ¢) gang or 3qH ‘near the skin’ (gg+=da, § 574, ¢); IgagHy or IGA ‘near the river; IqRITH or IgE ‘near the mountain; sgiasy ‘after Vishnu; ergarge ‘along the Ganges’ ATFATH ‘according to senior- ity; AFETH ‘in a corresponding manner J gE ‘towards the firey sfafezra < every night ;’ qagege or qwegs, before one’s eyes; qe “out of sight ;’ fawfarsa ¢ free from flies ;’ srfqiRzs ¢ beyond sleep,’ i.e. ‘wakefully ; qrsraicg ‘in accordance with one’s strength; Fras ‘as long as life lasts; d.e. ‘all one’s life; ggfy ‘like Hari; QIU, ‘ with the grass,’ i.e. ‘including even the grass’ (gui @g; @F is usually changed to @ in Avyayibhava-compounds ). § 576. Compounds may be compounded again with other simple or compound words, and the compounds so formed may become the mem- bers of new compounds. This repeated composition may theoretically be carried to any extent. In practice, however, we find that the further we follow back the current of Sanskrit literature to the time when Sanskrit was really a living and spoken language, the more sparing is the employment of compound words and the more limited the length of the compounds actually used. The student, when writing, therefore, should avoid long and unwieldy compounds. When dissolving a long compound, he should, unless it be a Dvandva, always dissolve it first into its two main parts, and should dissolve these again, until none but simple words remain. | CHAPTER X. INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. § 577. The various forms which have been taught in the preceding chapters, are not learnt for their own sake, but for the use to be made of them in the sentence. For, when speaking or writing a language people do not employ single unconnected words, but express, what they 34 8 : 2606 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR, [§578— wish to say, in sentences, consisting as a rule of several connected words the forms of which are chosen in accordance with the meaning which the speaker desires to convey, A full account of the structure of senten- ces would far exceed the limits of this grammar ; but it appears desirable to give at least the most common rules for the employment in the sentence of the principal verbal and declensional forms, of which in general only the formation has been hitherto explained. 1. THE FINITE VERB. § 578. The most important part of a sentence is the verb, for on the verb mainly depend the forms of the other words which a sentence may contain. Moreover, only a verbal form may by itself, without the addition of any other words, form a complete sentence ; and in sentences which contain no verbal form, the sense is not complete, unless we supply at least some form or other, commonly a form of the Present Indicative, of the verb srg ‘to be.” There is a tendency, especially in the later language, to employ primary nouns, such as the Past Passive and Past Active Participles, and the Verbal Adjectives, in place of the: proper verbal forms, the finite verb. § 579. According to Chapter VIL, a verbal form may be used in Parasmaipada or Atmanepada, or it may be Passive. A Parasmaipada or Atmanepada form denotes that a certain agent performs the action, or undergoes the state, expressed by the root or verbal base. A Passive form denotes that somebody or something is the object of the action expressed by the root or verbal base; or it denotes, in the case of intran- sitive verbs, that the action or state expressed by the root is going on or brought about by a certain agent. Where in a sentence the verb is Par. or Atm. (active construction), the subject of the sentence, if it be expressed by a separate noun, denotes the agent of the verbal action ; and where the verb is in the Passive (passive construction), the subject of the sentence, if expressed by a separate noun, denotes the object of the verbal action, the agent of which is expressed by a noun in the Instr. case. Passive forms of intransitive verbs are always used in the third Person Sing., and have no separate subject in the sentence, because the action is only one, and because the subject is invariably contained in the verbal form itself (impersonal construction); here, too, the agent by whom the action is brought about is expressed by a noun in the Instr. case. The later language shows a decided preference for passive and impersonal constructions. FZ, g.— Active construction: Het gaara ‘he sees lotuses; gwE w+: § 582.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 267 gata ¢ man worships God; gf a= ‘I praise God; surge Brea: ga ¢ the pupil serves his master.’ Passive construction ; 338: §=4& ‘you are served by servants; FYUNTAT Strgey ‘the enemies are conquered by the prince.’ Impersonal construction : irra TA, OF FAITH, Or TA: ‘the servant is sitting ;’ ‘the two servants are sitting; the servants are sitting. Note: The student should clearly understand that the agent of the verbal action is not necessarily the subject of the sentence. § 580. The use of the three numbers of verbal forms can offer no difficulty. As regards the three persons, it may be mentioned that, when the subject of the sentence consists of several nouns connected by ‘the particle 5, of which one is the pronoun of the first person, the verb stands in the first person ; and that the verb stands in the second person, when the subject consists of several nouns connected by 9, of which one is the pronoun of the second, and none the pronoun of the first person. Eg. «1&9 ga94 qT; &F AE FT QAI; 4 q qIT9A qq § 581. The use of the tenses and moods, too, is comparatively simple, and does not offer nearly the same difficulties which this subject presents in other classical languages. The reasons of this are, that the Sanskrit language avoids the indirect form of speech ; that the Subjanc- tive mood has almost entirely gone out of use; that tenses, the uses of which must once have been clearly defined and strictly kept separate, have come to be employed promiscuously ; that relations between things or ideas which in other languages are expressed by subordinate sen- tences, are expressed by means of compound or secondary nouns, or by verbal derivatives; the preference, shown more especially by the later language, for passive and impersonal constructions, and for the use of Participles and Verbal Adjectives in place of the finite verb ; etc. («¢)—The Present Tense ( Present Indicative ). § 582. (a) The Present tense is used to express that an action takes place or is going on, or has not been brought to a close, at the time of speaking; or is always going on, or performed habitually ; or to state a natural fact, a general truth, etc. Z.g. s15f #{ FIST qRuT: geigiassia ‘my whole retinue here is wanting to run away ;’ gaTi- Ag ‘we are studying here; @afeq Fer: ‘rivers flow;’ Rraaay agr garg ‘the Ganges rises from the Himélaya ; ete. (0) The Present may also denote what has just taken place, or will take place soon. Z.g. HZETAISTE | AgAIT=zNH | ¢ When did you come ? 268 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 583— I came just now.” gr AREA 1 €F A=31H | “When shall you go? I am going now.’ § 583. (a) In connection with the particle @r the Present conveys the meaning usually denoted by the Imperfect or Perfect (§ 584). Z.g. FHA AIG am faz: afdgafd & ‘in a certain forest there dwelt a lion named Bhésuraka.’ (6) In connection with gyy ( without @r) the Present or any past tense may be used to denote past time preceding the current day. £.g, FA=AE IU SIH, OF FAG, OF FY:, OF HARY: formerly the pupils dwelt here.’ (¢) ‘With the adverbs qraq and gr the Present conveys a future sense. F.g. qgafywd Fraga Arg: ‘till the sun sets’ (or ‘shall have set’); YHA FATT FISSAT FU 3 ¢ you will again cling to my neck. (d) In regard to future events, the Present or a Future may be used after gr and Hig (§ 194) ; after any interrogative, when a desire for something is intimated ; and also where there is no interrogative, when the reward is stated that will be earned by the fulfilment of a desire. E.g. ®z0 gg or Wega ‘when will he eat? FIAT (et A or Fry who of you will give alms?’ gy 37s gaia (or TE) a =i meat (or aifisgfy) © he who will give me food, will go to heaven.’ (0)—The three Past Tenses. § 584. (a) In classical literature the three Past Tenses are used without any apparent distinction, to denote any kind of past time. (b) But in the older literature the Aorist at any rate is decidedly differently employed from the Imperfect and Perfect, and native gram- marians distinguish between the three tenses thus: The Aorist either (like the Past Passive and Past Active Participles) simply denotes the completion of an action, or it denotes past time of the current day, recent past time. The Imperfect denotes past time preceding the current day, remote past time. And the Perfect, like the Imperfect, denotes remote past time, but, unlike the Imperfect, it is used with reference to events not witnessed by the speaker. Hence it is that the Imperfect and Perfect are used in narratives referring to the remote past, while the Aorist, unless it merely denotes the completion of an ac- tion, is the proper tense to use (particularly in dialogues) of events that have taken place at, or close to, the time of speaking, within sight or hearing of the speaker or hearer. The Imperfect and Perfect would have to be translated by the English Imperfect, the Aorist by the Perfect Present, with or without the addition of the adverb ‘now.’ Z.g.— § 587.) INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 269 IQTETT TF TE | evgrg | greta | C He gives (Pres) a cow to the teacher ; he has given ( Aor.) one ; he will give (Simple Fut.) one.’ aw § IA A AFA A17 | rar | stat & F gy aoe qr l “To him was born (Perf.) a son, by name Rohita. Then (Varuna) said (Perf.) to him : Now a son has been born (dor.) to thee; sacrifice him to me,’ : q aaRaaigy SisTiufy | a33agars gaa | adr F ®t am qATIRITATT | ¢ Prajapati said (Zmpf): Who am I then? (Indra) an- swered (Impf.): Exactly what you have said (dor) just now. Hence it is that Prajépati came (Zmpf.) to be called Ka.’ § 585. (a) The Aorist also conveys the notion that an action was performed continuously. Z.g. grastiagaaagrd ‘ He was giving food all his life.’ : (6) The Perfect is used in an emphatic denial. Z.9. qf FISFIRTH ‘I certainly did not go to Kalinga.’ (c)—The two Futures. § 586. (a) The Simple Future and the Periphrastic Future stand in the same relation to each other as the Aorist and the Imperfect. For while the Simple Future either simply denotes futurity generally, as opposed to what is present or past, or denotes an action which will take place during the current day or in the near future, the Periphras- tic Future is used of such actions as will take place after the current day or in the more remote future. And similarly to what we have observed in the case of the Aorist ( § 585, « ), the Simple Future is also employed to express the continuousness of a future action. Z.g. geq- gash AF HIST GHTTIAT ‘there will be born (or) there exists (al- ready now ) etc; ITAA qEETH ‘to-day I shall enter the village ;’ sRRTETETERN ‘ before long you will receive ; grasfrawenrafeia ‘he will be teaching all his life’;—=r: gy ‘he will do to-morrow.’ (0) The Simple Future also denotes purpose, intention, desire, will, ete. £.g. G3 FH FREAFFFATAETS TE TE TE HFAANT BCAA ‘one who wishes to use a pot goes to the house of the potter and says : make me a pot ; I want to use it.’ (d) The Imperative. § 587. The Imperative expresses command, prescript, entreaty, request, invitation, wish, deliberation or inquiry (all which meanings it shares with the Potential). It also denotes permission, or intimates that an action is seasonable (and these meanings, as well as that of order or 270 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 588— command, the Imperative has in common with the Verbal Adjectives). The Imperative also (like the Benedictive) denotes a blessing. Z.g. gfy ‘come !’ gr wFAMT=SF (or Area q) ‘come to the village!’ gg war (or steve) ‘please, sit here’ stfiemEl wad WEE waraeAgag (or wweqgad ) © we request you to teach the boy sqrag- arena (or srfiefrg) and nouns or verbs conveying the same or similar meanings. Z.g. Sc Aasigs ¢ competent to nner) ? gis OST gH ‘you are able to protect the creatures; rig: “able to bring; Hig grea ¢ he is able to carry ; ete § 597. The Infinitive is also used with FS, TAT and ger ‘it is time to. E.g. Hr Or HAY OF awl AEH ‘it is time to eat’ ( =FrBY WiswE or FR gga war; § 590, ¢). (6)—The Gerunds in egy and 7. § 598. (az) The Gerunds in egq7 and f denote an action which in point of time precedes the action expressed by another (generally the min) verb ( of the sentence), and has the same agent. Z.g. wat getter ‘he goes after having eaten’; J=AT faafg ‘he first eats and then drinks’; ; gia qa CEL aT ‘after she had said so, the ashes were seen her,’ i.e. ‘when she had said so, she saw the ashes.’ (b) Sanskrit Gerunds may often in English be translated by preposi- tions or adverbial phrases. Eg. fret or gaan or erry * having led or taken’ i.e. ‘together with ;’ gat or {gy ‘having left or abandoned’ i.e. ‘without; HT T= ate. A fra: ‘ the mountain stands on this side of the river; {{qsHed qe dal (rar ‘the river is beyond the mountain.’ § 603.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 273 § 599. sr@w and @g may be used with the Gerund, to express a prohibition. Z.g. 1& gfgear ‘do not weep’ ; t& Fear or gg FA1= wr Fi: (§ 588). (c)—The Participles. § 600. (a) The Participles of the Present and of the Simple Fu- ture convey the same meanings as the tenses to which they belong. (6) The Present Participles may be used to show how another action takes place or why it takes place. Z.g. ZraraT gaya ga+r: ‘the Yavanas eat lying down,’ i.e. they lie down when eating; spfraray Taf ‘he dwells (at a place) for the purpose of studying.’ § 601. The Perfect Participles denote any kind of past time, and the Participle of the Parasmai. is often used in place of the finite verb. Eg. sqarRaERE: qriuifad, ¢ Kautsa approached, or has approached, Panini’ (= yqrefiga, or 9q@1g,; or YUE). § 602. The Past Passive and Past Active Participles denote the completion of an action, or past time generally, and both are, especially in the later language, often used in place of the finite verb, either with or without the auxiliary verb HY ‘to be.’ Fg. magma AtT a8 ufdEs 7 °F 7A Fad ‘you did nothing that was displeas- ing to me, and nothing was done by me that was disagreeble to you’; qr © he said’; gran FAR =x gaffaar ‘the king handed over the boy to the queen.’ § 603. (a) The Past Passive Participle of transitive verbs denotes the object of theaction expressed by the verb, and takes the gender, number, and case of the noun to which it refers; formed of intransitive verbs, it is used impersonally, and appears in the Nom. Sing. of the neuter gender. L.g. Faq: %21 waar ‘a mat has been made by you,” i.e. you have made a mat; {rAd waar ¢ you have sat.’ (6) The Past Passive Participle of intransitive verbs, of verbs meaning ‘to go,” and of 3x ‘to embrace,’ Tg ‘to ascend,’ 714, Sq, 99, ‘to dwell,’ zit, and &T, even when with prepositions they are transitive, may also denote the agent. E.g. spifyay arg or siya Waar ‘you have sat’; fer faga: ‘you have run away’; Tq} 2ag=l ara ‘D. has gone to the village’; org gage ¢ D. has gone’; sir&ay Fai WAT Or ATER | T&T Waal ‘you have ascended the tree’; yqiRray % VE or IqRIAl gEAFar ‘you have approached the teacher,’ (c) The Past Passive Participle of intransitive verbs and of verbs meaning ‘to go’ or ‘to eat,’ may also denote the locality where an action 358 274 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 604— has taken place. £.g. ggawtATarad ‘this is the place where they have sat, here they sat’; gal ray, ‘here they went’; gTAqT gee here they ate; etc. (d) The Past Passive Participles of verbs meaning ‘to approve of’ or ‘wish,’ to know, or ‘to honour,’ may lose their past sense and be used like ordinary adjectives. Z.g. {IFT AF: or gg: ‘approved of by’ or ‘dear to kings’; {ryt gira: ‘honoured by’ or ‘an object of reverence for kings’; qa fatgqd ‘ known to me’; ete. ( For the Genitive, see § 642, a.) (d)—The Verbal Adjectives. § 604. (a) The Verbal Adjectives convey a passive meaning. Formed ~ of transitive verbs, they denote the object of the action expressed by the verb, and take the gender, number, and case of the noun to which they refer; formed of intransitive verbs, they are used impersonally, and appear in the Nom. Sing. of the neuter gender. They are frequently used in place of the finite verb. E.g. sae: Hr waar ‘a mat should be made by you,’ i.e. you should make a mat; sfrfigqsr {yaar ‘you ought to sit down’; egqraigds Wadd ‘you should be attentive’ (§ 614,10). (0) The Verbal Adjectives, like the Imperative, denote a command or injunction, or permission, or express that an action is seasonable (§587); and, like the Potential, they may be used to express that a person de- serves, or is fit or able, to do a thing (§ 590, 6). 3. THE CASES OF NOUNS. § 605. Inflected nouns are employed to denote the persons or things who or which are represented by the speaker as intrumental in bringing about the action or state expressed by the verb of a sentence. These persons or things may in turn be specified or more closely defined by means of other inflected nouns; and inflected nouns may also be used in, or in connection with, the adverbial expressions by which a verbal form may be accompanied; to denote the duration of an action or state, or to add various other particulars. § 606. Omitting here the Vocative case, as requiring no special remark, we may say in general, that of the seven remaining cases all, except the Genitive, are employed to denote the different ways in which persons or things may be instrumental in bringing about the action or state denoted by the verb, as agents, or objects, or instruments, or reci- pients of the object of an action, etc.; and that for the Genitive is prima- rily reserved the function of expressing relations such as obtain between persons or things denoted by nouns. In special cases, however, the Geni- § 609.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 275 tive may be employed beyond what may be said to be its proper sphere; and most of the other cases are frequently used in construction with nouns, adverbs, or prepositions, or to convey statements of various kinds, as will be shown below. And on the whole it may be added here, that the employment of the several cases depends not merely on what the speaker wishes to say, but also on the manner in which he desires to present a fact to the hearer. (a)—The Nominative. § 607. (a) The Nominative, in active construction, denotes the agent, and in passive construction the object of the action expressed by the verb (§579). E.g. #2 ify a9gw: ‘ D. makes a mat;’ Hz: Brad FETT ‘a mat is made by D. (6) When the agent or object is put In the Nom.,, their predicate is pb, in the same case. Z.g. TUEANAZAH, ‘that became a golden egg’; JET FIT =F FATA ATR ‘he was made by the king possessed of the title Yuvardja.’ (0)—The Accusative. § 608. (a) The Accusative denotes, in active construction, the di- rect object of the action expressed by the verb. With verbs expressive of going, moving, or leading towards, and the like, the Acc. also denotes the goal of motion. £.g. FZ Fifa ‘he makes a mat’; ETAT ‘he sees thieves’ ; gra w=zfar ‘he goes to the village’; fRIRITETEATR, ‘I shall go to the state of one who deserves to be laughed at, I shall make myself ridiculous’; etc. () When the direct object is put in the Acc., the objective predicate is put in the same case. E.g. gr FIXFAFUT he made them both the aim of his arrow.’ (c) ‘With verbs of going, the goal of motion may optionally be put in the Dative, when bodily motion is spoken of. Z.g. a or JIATA T gar =a fagy: ‘a messenger sent to Ra- she’; Fg aaa ‘ he accoutres himself for battle’; 5 JA FIR ¢ wood for a sacrificial post’; FISIT foggy ¢ gold for an earring’; {FIAT TT ‘a pot for cooking.’ § 621, (a) The Dative of a primary noun denoting an action or state may be used in the place of an Infinitive of purpose. Z.g. Qr&IA asf “he goes in order to cook’ ( = Ih Ad, § 995 ); SATAQATONT q: AER QEGAANT © your weapon is for the protection (Dat.) of the distressed, not to inflict (/nf.) a wound on the innocent.’ (0) The Dative may also be employed to denote the object of an Infi- nitive of purpose, provided the Infinitive itself be omitted. Z.g. TERA aarfa ¢ he goes to fetch flowers’ (=geqrugiEg asdf); FATT AGIA ¢ he lifted the thunderbolt to strike Vritra’ (=gd g#g®). + § 622. With verbs such as gq ®eqq, |g HYAF, FY, ATF, or 3, and even without the employment of any verb, the Dative denotes that to which something else tends or conduces, or what something else causes or produces, or is made to undergo or becomes, ete. £.g. {AYIA HOT ‘it tends to produce’ or Saute distress;’ ugar Wl FHI: ‘anger causes salinity’ 5 ATG Fal qa ‘may he grant you prosperity! wim FET ON A gHqTy © advice tends to enrage fools; gar WIAA fF 7 Heya © why do you not become his wife ? ete. § 623. The employment of the Dative case in construction with the following verbs may be specially drawn attention to : (¢) With TE, EAld ‘to long for,” the Dat, denotes the thing longed for. Z .g. eq: gaia ‘he longs for flowers.’ (0) With «, qieaf@ ‘to owe,” the person to whom a thing is due. Z.g. FATE Ia GATT ‘he owes a hundred to D. (¢) With g=1 ¢ to be plesant, to please,’ wg ‘to be agtesahls to the taste,” and synonymous verbs, the person pleased. E.g. gz Ed HiZF: ¢ the sweetmeat is pleasant to D.’ or ¢D, likes the sweetmeat.’ 280 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. 8 624, — (d) With FY ‘to be angry with,’ ga ‘to meditate mischief against, gq. ‘to be jealous of,’ qGA agar ‘to envy,’ and synonymous verbs, the person with whom one is angry, ete. Z.g. gqg0q Fa ‘he is an- gry with D.’—But when FY and 8% have a preposition prefixed to them, they are construed with the Acc. case; e.g. qagaanTFAf- (¢) With sgyer ‘to flatter,” & (f-g etc.), ‘to deny, conceal from,” rt 2 2 (fsa) ‘to stand by, declare oneself in favour of,” and zr to swear, asseverate by oath,’ the Dat. denotes the person whom one flatters, from whom one conceals a thing, ete. F.g. gga gtaa ‘he flatters Dj ete. § 624. (a) The Dative is employed with sy@g ‘enough for, sufficient for, a match for,” and synonymous expressions. F.g, 3[(@& Ag HAZT or ggg! HAG Or gHAfd AG! AGA ‘the (one) wrestler is a match for the (other ) wrestler.’ (6) With fgg ¢ good’ or ‘salutary for.” F.g. feaammanas ‘ good for a diseased person.’ (¢) With sa: ‘adoration to and wgfig hail to! Z.g. adr 3+: ¢ adoration to the gods! wgieq marisa: © hail to the people! : (e)—The Ablative. § 625. The Ablative denotes that from which something else is represented as moving away or being removed; that from which some- thing keeps away, or is kept away, or deviates, and the like; the place or source from which something starts or proceeds, or is obtained, etc. F.g. TIATED © he comes from the village; gagrgatigfa © he descends from the mountain; srsreqrqa: ‘fallen from the horse; srargTatera ‘he sees from the palace; strgaresierar ‘he sees from his seat; gas4y Tt IA- f& or faaqala he keeps off’ or ‘turns away the cow from the barley; TATA: AHI FTN Frans © Sémkéishya is four yojanas distant from Gavidhumat’ (§ 611, d) ; Jvay Tsay ‘ received from them,’ ete. § 626. The employment of the Ablative case with the following words may be specially drawn attention to : («) With words implying fear of, protection from, abhorrence, devia- tion from, discontinuance, or failing against, the Abl. denotes that of which one is afraid, or from which one protects, or which one abhors, 2a ete. K.g. AFA [EC ‘he is afraid of thieves ;’ SR¥Ieargy ‘he pro- tects from thieves; Fryar Wa ‘fear from thieves; spgAisreaa ‘he abhors unrighteousness; qaifFwAia or {aaa or gwr=iy ‘he discon- tinues, or deviates from, righteousness;’ etc. § 629.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 281 (6) With verbs meaning ‘to hide,” the Abl. denotes that from which one wishes to hide. Z.g. IqregraTgeayw or fA@iga ‘he hides from the teacher.’ (¢) With verbs meaning * to learn from, to hear from, to study under,’ etc., the Abl. denotes the person from whom one learns. Z.g. gqreqar- CIR) or srl ‘he learns from the teacher; gry: sear ‘having heard from them.’ (d) With SAT, the Abl. denotes the material out of which a thing is produced or made; and with 3 (3-33 etc.) the source from which anything starts. Z.g. 3rgr=sr sraq ‘the arrow is made out of horn ;’ fgqaat FT Tala ‘ the Ganges rises from the Himéilaya.’ § 627. The Ablative is used with Comparatives and words having a comparative sense, to denote that which is surpassed by something else. L.g. arg: qrzfagassa: FARA: ‘ the inhabitants of Mathura are more delicate than those of Pataliputra ; qfadg gerzdad! ‘ intelligence is more important than strength; srgfifgvongfaftsga ‘loss of fame surpasses, i. ¢, is worse than, death.’ § 628. (a) gag ‘other than,’ stay, fige ¢ different from,’ and synony- mous words, and the adverbs sgg ‘except, without, and =wqrgrq ‘far from’ or ‘near to’ are construed with the Abl, case. Z.g. gq SI, ‘other than D.; =gq FIAT ‘ without D.,’ ete. (6) The Ab is also employed with qa, 3=¥, and other words which originally denote a point of the compass; with adverbs like gif, 3TH; and with ggror, Fron ¢ to the south of’ and gr, sey ‘to the north of.” Z.g. gat quar, ‘east of the village ;’ ga} drerrga=a: ‘spring comes before summer ;’ ARITATE , Fiero AT, ete. (c) But gyamig and similar adverbs in qe, giarorg: and others in q:, IF and others in HT, and Iq, qT, ST: are construed with the Gen. ; g=ror and others in gq with the Acc, or Gen, Z.g. gIEATIH ‘east of the village ;’ gfegore ad, or grag ‘south of the village,” ete. § 629. (a) TX ‘far from,” srfeg® ‘near to,’ and synonymous words are construed with the Abl, or Gen. The words FT ete. themselves, when used adverbially, may be put in the Acc., Instr., Abl., or Loc. case. Z.g. qT or gam or FI, or Te Irate or grag ‘far from the village.’ (0) gz ‘separate from’ and rar ¢ different from’ may be construed with the Abl. or Instr, case; and {Far ¢ without ’ with the Abl., or Insti, or Acc. case. Z.g. 2 : DHEA, 2 or g or : 9. YATTIIWIG, OF SAGA; [AAT STG, OF FATAA 282 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§630— § 630. The following prepositions are used with the Ablative: (a) =rg and gf in the sense of ‘excepting, except in. Z.g. 3g {&- JY FE ga: ‘rain has fallen except in Trigarta.’ (0) =r in the sense of ‘up to,’ ‘until’ or ¢ from, since.” Z.g. a1 qris- garg ‘up to Pataliputra ; sir Srezwre, ¢ until the sixteenth (year); ar Fge1q ¢ from the root 5 oT Ste: “since birth. (c) mfg when conveying the meaning ‘almost equal to’ or ¢in return or exchange for’ Z.g. wg: seonafa (or Heo: ofa, § 167, a) ‘ Pradyumna is almost equal to Krishna ; {q@eq: qiag=sia amar, ‘he gives beans in exchange for sesamum.’ (f)—The Locative. § 631. The Locative denotes the locality of the agent or object of an action ; the place, where or near which anything is, or where it is placed ; the time or occasion when, or the circumstances under which, anything takes place. Z.g. %z array ‘ he sits on a mat myrAT IA ga¥ ‘ he cooks rice in a pot; Aey Jeg ‘oil (is) in sesamum ; qa Fafa ‘he dwells with his teacher ; ggugitayag: ‘the two fell down at his feet ; CRUGE quay fatafery ‘the burden of; the world was placed on the ministers; {fy fazrg: ‘confidence (placed) in me; gesia 4| ‘affection towards friends’ afegeeis ‘at that time; aferaagy ‘on that occasion.’ § 632. Exceptionally the locality is denoted by the Accusative, in connection with the verbs s1f¥-zit ‘to lie upon,’ sfer-yr ¢ to stand upon, inhabit,” |{¥r-aa1e © to sit upon, occupy,’ srfy-fAzr ‘to sit down in, occupy,’ and with gg ‘to dwell” after the prepositions wife, 31g, IT, and #1. Fg. qraaeqrE ‘(an army ) occupies the village; qiqRIiaga ‘ he stands on the mountain,’ ete. § 633. (a) The Locative may also denote that for the sake of which, or to obtain which, an action is performed, provided the thing sought after be connected with the object of the action, =#{or Fity®. lea “he kills the tiger for the sake of its skin.’ (6) In construction with certain adjectives in gq derived from Past Pass. Participles, such as spefifge one who has studied,’ AAT ¢ one who has learnt by heart,” etc., the Loc. denotes the object of the verbs from which the Past Pass. Participles are derived. Z.g. sefiar sATEHTI ‘one who has studied grammar, versed in grammar.’ § 634. (a) When the action performed or the state undergone by a person or thing is mentioned for the purpose of determining the time at § 638.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE, 283 which, or the circumstances under which, an action is performed or a state undergone by another person or thing, the word expressing the former person or thing together with the noun qualifying it (which commonly is a Participle) is put in the Locative case (Locative ab- solute). Z.g. iy ATA NT: ‘he went (at the time) when the * cows are milked; FEY YATRY TRET arrga ‘while the wealthy are eating, the poor sit by ;’ qiRg=na fF Fy what happened, when he had gone?’ Fay unframed traft ‘how can there be any hind- rance of religious actions, when you are the protector?’ Tag ¢ when this had been said ;’ ga @fa ‘such being the case,’ ete. (b) Instead of the Locative, it is permitted to use the Genitive ab- solute, to express the meaning of ¢ notwithstanding,” ‘although,’ or ‘in spite of.” E.g. smvzra: (or spiamia ) SraATsiiq ‘in spite of the fact that (people ) were crying, he went into exile; qzgatsiy # frgiqea: ‘ the child was carried off, although I was looking on,’ etc. § 635. The Locative or Genitive case may be used : (a) In the sense of ‘among’ or ‘of’ with Superlatives and words conveying a similar meaning, Z.g. AFAY or AFA qfqa: Faq: the Kshatriya is the bravest among men’ or ¢ of men.’ (0) In construction with the nouns =f possessor, master, TA “lord,” srferqiy ‘ruler,’ gram © heir,” qrigg ¢ witness,’ TRY ¢ a surety,’ and ggq ‘born to, prospective possessor of.” F.g. my or IFT WIHT ‘an owner of cows,’ etc. (c) With ATF ¢occupied with, engaged in,’ and Fre ‘clever in’ E.g. Sg: FIFI Or FrForE ‘engaged in making mats.’ § 636. "The Locative or Instrumental case may be used with mferq ¢ attached’ or ‘devoted to’ and gH ‘anxious about.’ F.g. FATE: or FACE: ¢anxious about his hair.’ § 637. In construction with gg ‘good to’ and fag Sev to,’ either the Locative may be used, or one of the prepositions ay aR, or fq with the Ace. case. F.g. argzaz=l HAW, or FIITAY Or [qaT qf, or {aT Ii ‘D. is good to his mother.’ § 638. The following prepositions are used with the Locative: (a) wafer when conveying the meaning of ‘ruling over’ or ‘ruled over by.” E.g. sfx 9gRY garg: ‘Brahmadatta rules over Paifichila ;’ SIT Fare green: ‘ Pafichéla is ruled over by Brahmadatta.’ (6) gq in the sense of ‘above, in addition to, in excess of.” F.g. gq QT Zor ‘a drone in addition to’ or ‘in excess of a khdri.’ 284 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR. [§ 639— (9) The Genitive. § 639. It has been already stated (§ 606), that the Genitive differs from the other cases mainly in this, that the persons or things denoted ~ by it are not represented in any way as instrumental in bringing about the action expressed by a verb. The Genetive, therefore, as a rule, cannot be used in construction with verbal forms, but primarily denotes the manifold relations between persons or things expressed by nouns. It may also be said that the Genitive is employed to denote any relation what- ever, to express which no other case has been specially prescribed. E.g. UF: gE: ¢ the king's man; qaiy: q1g:; ‘the foot of the animal; fag: ga: ‘the father’s son,’ faery ww way ‘I possess wealth ;’ at Joa QeaTaasy Che divided the splendour of Vishnu among the two wives.’ § 640. (a) Contrary to the general rule the Genitive is used to de- note the object of verbs of ‘remembering’ or ‘thinking of,’ of gzg ‘to rule,’ gar ¢ to shave’ or ‘sympathize with,’ and of some other less com- mon verbs. F.g. ®Ig: &HI(a ¢ he remembers his mother ;’ gira 38 ‘he rules the earth, etc. (8) And in connection with multiplicatives, it denotes the time in which an action is repeatedly performed. F.g. qIFAISTT qs ‘he eats five times a day,’ § 641. (a) By the general rule, the agent or the object of what is denoted by any primary noun should be put in the Gen. case. E.g. wag sHay, the arrival of you,” i.e, your arrival; rqf ®er ‘the creator of the water ; ger War ‘ the bearer of the thunderbolt.’ (6) But when a primary noun is accompanied, at the same time, by both its agent and its object, generally only the object is put in the Genitive, the agent being denoted by the Instr. case. E.g. ATHAT TIT Zgisaiqreas ¢ wonderful is the milking of the cows (Obj. Gen.) by one who is not a cow-herd (Ag. Instr.) ; but fyfrat {AeqEaE ze ‘ Vishnumitra’s (4g. Gen.) desire of making a mat (Obj. Gen.). § 642. In construction with the following primary nouns the agent and the object are denoted (not by the Gen., but) by the same cases (Instr. or Ace, ), by which they are denoted in construction with pure- ly verbal forms: (a) The Infinitive, the Gerunds, and Participles: ( except the Past Pass. Participles described in § 603, ¢ and d ). E.g. %Z 3®q ‘to make a mat; 2 Fear having made a mat; sige que ‘ cooking rice FFA Faw ‘done by D.;’ (but grgrlre: ‘dear to kings; ga fafyay ‘known to me’); ete. (6) Nouns in § derived from Desiderative bases (§ 539, 8). E.g. &Z aay: ¢ desivous of making a mat.’ § 646.] INFLECTED WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 285 (c) Nouns in gg, such as gigs killing,’ AWTHS ¢approaching;’ ete. Hg. gegreergs: ¢ killing calves.’ (d) Nouns in g denoting a habit, ete. L.g. gtgarn FAA, ‘in the habit of talking slander of people.’ (¢) Nouns in xz or 7% when they oonsey a future Sense) and those in gw, when the object is a debt. X.g. AEH WISH qara ‘he goes to eat (§ 595) rice; Fg Frat paying a hundred.’ (f) Nouns like FG, gYegy ‘easy to be made,’ gH ¢difficult to be made. Z.g. gE: Ft waar < the mat is easy to be made by you,’ t.e., it is easy for you to make the mat; aq gagy ‘difficult to be carried by him.’ § 643. In construction with Verbal Adjectives the agent may be put in the Instr. or Gen. case. E.g. WAT OF HFA: HT: FI: ‘a mat should be made hy you,’ 7.¢., you should make a mat. § 644. (a) The Gen. or Instr. case may be used with adjectives ex- pressive of likeness or similarity. Z.g. gay or geal SagwE OF 3a3- J ‘like’ or ‘similar to D.’ (6) The Gen. or Dat. case may be used in blessings with nouns like rgeq ‘long life,” yz ‘prosperity,’ Fzr® ‘good health,” ga ‘happiness,’ feq < welfare, ete. Z.g. AGH FTFAH or FAT YAY, ‘ long life to Devadatta !’ Number and Gender. § 645. The use of the three numbers of nouns ealls for no particu- lar remark. As regards the three genders, it may be noted that an adjective which refers to both a masculine and a feminine noun, takes the masculine gender ; and that it takes the neuter gender when it re- fers to govern nouns of which one at least is neuter. Fg. @f q{&=x igult = gI ‘that man and his wife are well-conducted ;’ & qy=™ IRE frraEgES © that man and his conduct are atodiine § 646. As intimated in § 577, the preceding rules are intended rather, for the guidance of the beginner to lay down some general prin- ciples, than to give a complete account of all the syntactical facts of the language. Sanskrit having been in constant use for thousands of years, a set of rules valid for one period of the language could never be ex- pected to be strictly observed during all times and by every writer. Moreover, it should not be forgotten that most works of the so-called classical Sanskrit were composed at a time when Sanskrit had ceased to be a living language, and when authors, even the best of them, in attempting to follow the guidance of their great gram were by no means always successful. EE Lend ENG \ UNI IVERSITY x Sasromh i LEY LIBRARIE U.C. BERKE S UNAMID €l11l288kL503 at od ra < a ES PR PUNGAAASREIAR Cay SC INA a W 8 hm mg A